Anda di halaman 1dari 390

Option Switches Reference Guide

ALIAS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR TECHNICAL OR EDITORIAL ERRORS OR OMISSIONS CONTAINED HEREIN NOR FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE FURNISHING, PERFORMANCE OR USE OF THIS MATERIAL. It is the policy of Alias Limited to enforce any and all rights relating to protection of this information. The information contained in this manual is proprietary in nature and may not be reproduced, copied or divulged in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Alias Limited. This manual has been provided pursuant to the terms of a contract or confidentiality agreement. Unauthorised distribution or disclosure of its contents is a violation of that contract or agreement and persons doing so may be liable for penalties as provided by law. Copyright 1991-2003 Alias Limited. All Rights Reserved. Alias Limited 1 Stuart Road, Manor Park Runcorn, Cheshire WA7 1TS United Kingdom Telephone: Fax: Email:

+44 (0) 1928 579311 +44 (0) 1928 579389 info@alias.ltd.uk

I-Sketch, I-Sketch Classic, I-Sketch Field, I-Sketch Client, I-Convert, I-Export, I-Run, I-Tools, I-View, I-View CAD, I-Data Integrator, SPOOLGEN and ISOGEN are registered trademarks of Alias Limited. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

ALIAS

Option Switches Reference Guide

Option Switches listed by number:


Click on an Option Switch name to access its information.

Option Switches listed by number: 1


1. Plotfile length 1 2. Cut piece numbering/list type 2 3. Drawing trim marks 4 4. Drawing text size 5 5. Co-ordinates - Connection/connectivity 7 6. Date output 8 7. Pipeline splitting - User control 9 8. Dimension line standout 11 9. Dimension form 14 10. Drawing margin - Left 16 11. Drawing margin - Right 17 12. Drawing margin - Top 18 13. Drawing margin - Bottom 19 14. Drawing size - Standard postscript plotter size 20 15. Drawing size - Height 22 16. Drawing size - Width 23 17. Flow arrows - Components 24 18. Drawing frame - Program standard 25 19. Sloping pipeline indication method 26 20. Sloping pipeline indication limit 27 21. Isometric type 28 22. Cut piece add-on allowance 30 23. Material list - Controls and File type 31 24. Material list - Pipeline/drawing and Pipeline length units 33 25. Material list and Title block- position 34 26. Material list - Descriptions 35 27. Material list - Text size 36 28. Material list - Item code length 37 29. Material list - Line spacing 38 30. Material list - Continuation method 39 31. Drawing output - File/screen 41 32. Drawing output - scaling 42 33. Revision/detailed marker 43 34. Drawing output - Picture scale 44 35. Drawing - Reserved areas 45 36. Drawing output - Stacking value 46 37. Drawing output - Stacking orientation 47 38. Pipeline splitting - Automatic 48
Switches by name

ALIAS

39. Spool piece identifiers 49 40. Pipe supports 52 41. Bore/Dimension/Weight Control 55 42. Drawing viewpoint 59 43. Pipe wastage factor - Area 1 60 44. Pipe wastage factor - Area 2 61 45. Pipe wastage factor - Area 3 62 46. Pipe wastage factor - Area 4 63 47. Pipe wastage factor - Area 5 64 48. Pipe wastage factor - Area 6 65 49. Pipe wastage factor - Area 7 66 50. Pipe wastage factor - Area 8 67 51. Pipe wastage factor - Area 9 68 52. Equipment trim drawings 69 53. Weld numbering 71 54. Weld plotting 74 55. Program messages - Run information 75 56. Program messages - Isodat 77 57. Program messages - Isoplot 78 58. Clear screen 79 59. Instrument identification 80 60. Component tagging 81 61. Insulation indication 82 62. Tracing indication 83 63. Printed output - Page length 84 64. Pipe support identification 85 65. Bolting units 86 66. Co-ordinates - Supplementary 87 67. Sloping pipeline - 3D skew depiction 90 68. Sloping pipeline - Vertical branches 91 69. Terminal type identification 92 70. Skew indication - Branches 94 71. Plotfile format 95 72. Reserved 97 73. Material part number enclosure style 98 74. Material list accumulation control 100 75. Weld number - Enclosure and prefix 102 76. Material part number enclosure shape 104 77. Weld number allocation at slip-on flanges and reinforcement pads 78. Support Weld Number Enclosures 107 79. Site Assembly Identification 110 80. Dimensions - To valve centres 112 81. Dimensions - Branches 114 82. C of G / Weight output 116 83. Spare switch 118 84. Spare switch 119 85. Spare switch 120

105

Switches by name

ALIAS

86. Spare switch 121 87. Spare switch 122 88. Spare switch 123 89. Spare switch 124 90. Material control - Comdace file contents 125 91. Material control - Comdace file controls 126 92. DXF file units 127 93. Spare switch 128 94. Spare switch 129 95. Component leg length 130 96. Reserved 131 97. Skew depiction - Individual / overall 132 98. Spare switch 133 99. Skew depiction - Style 134 100. Skew depiction - Dimension line standout 136 101. Skew depiction - Triangle hatching 137 102. Skew depiction - Hatching clearance 138 103. Spare switch 139 104. Spare switch 140 105. Spare switch 141 106. Spare switch 142 107. Spare switch 143 108. Pipeline splitting - In tube 144 109. Repeatability file content 145 110. Ghost gaps 147 111. Nozzles - Dotted 148 112. Flow arrows - Pipeline 149 113. Material control - Pipeline identification 150 114. Specification break indication 151 115. Tolerance - Angle offset 152 116. Tolerance - Dimension offset 153 117. Dimension round off 154 118. Dimensions - Overall 155 119. Dimensions / elevations - Vertical 157 120. Tapping - Branch scale 158 121. Tapping - Branch dimensions 159 122. Tapping - Branch co-ordinates 160 123. Instrument ID enclosure 161 124. Flange rotation angles 163 125. Reserved 164 126. Reserved 165 127. Isogen version / run date 166 128. Fab friendly isometrics 167 129. Interactive editing 169 130. Development testing 170 131. Development testing 171 132. Development testing 172

Switches by name

ALIAS

133. Development testing 173 134. Development testing 174 135. Development testing 175 136. Development testing 176 137. Development testing 177 138. Plotfile - DGN link and ASCII text 139. Development testing 179 140. Development testing 180

178

Versions Index
322

320

Switches by name

ALIAS

1.

Plotfile length

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

PLOTFILE LENGTH
Description

This Option Switch is used to control the physical length of the Plotfile that is generated by the ISOGEN program. It is only necessary to invoke the use of this switch when using the 'Multiple Isometrics In Each Plotfile' option (Option Switch 31=0) and the required Plotfile Length is different to the built-in default value of 3275 mm.

Switch Settings

0 Value

Default for Plotfile Length of 3275 mm. Where Value is set to the required Plotfile Length in whole mm's. Note. The maximum length is limited to 3350 mm.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Zero or Value
Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches. First Introduced Extended Use Version Date

1.0

APR 83

Details

OPT - 1
Switches by number Switches by name

-1-

ALIAS

2.

Cut piece numbering/list type

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

CUT PIECE NUMBERING / LIST TYPE


Description

The primary purpose of this Option Switch is to control the generation of the Cut Piece List and corresponding Cut Piece Identifiers (Numbers or Letters) at appropriate positions along the Plotted Pipeline. An option to have Cut Piece Identifiers (Numbers or Letters) starting a 1 or A on each isometric as opposed to each pipeline is also controlled here. There are two types of Cut Piece List - Old style with limited information and New style with full information. Finally, for Imperial Units Users- there is an Option to have the Cut Lengths listed on the New Style Cut piece List in Decimal Inches format. This being in addition to the regular value in the LENGTH column.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in five parts. SWITCH POSITION 1 - Cut Piece Numbering and Cut Piece List on/off control. 0 Default for No Cut Piece List or Cut Piece Identification Numbers/Letters. 1 Cut Piece List and Cut Piece Identifiers generated. 2 Cut Piece Identifiers starting at 1 (one) or A on each isometric drawing. SWITCH POSITION 2 - Cut Piece List Style. 0 Default for Old Style Cut Piece List. 1 For New Style Cut Piece List. (Continued overpage)
8 7 6 5 4
3 2

Switch Layout Switch Position 0,1 or 2 Version Date

Blank, Blank or 1 0 to 8 1 or 2

Zero or one First Introduced Extended Use

Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 48 - ISOMETRIC REPEATABILITY. DEV. NO. 56 - USER DEFINED BOM. Related Option Switches.

1.0 5.9.3 7.0

APR 83 JUN 90 OCT 93

Details Switches by number Switches by name

ISSUE 3

OPT - 2

-2-

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

CUT PIECE NUMBERING / LIST TYPE


Description

2 Cont.

Cut Piece Numbers can now be output on the isometric in a variety of alternative enclosure types which are controlled by Switch position 7 and 8
Switch Settings

(Continued from previous page)

SWITCH POSITION 3 - Alphabetic Cut Piece Identifiers. 0 1 Default for Numeric Cut Piece Identifiers. For Alphabetic Cut Piece Identifiers.

SWITCH POSITION 4 - Supplementary output of Cut Length in Decimal Inches. 0 1 Default for standard Cut Lengths only. For supplementary output of Cut Lengths in Decimal Inches format in the REMARKS column of the New Style Cut Piece List. (This option only applies to users who use Imperial Units).

SWITCH POSITION 5 - Calculation of Branch Cut Length to centre of main pipeline. 0 1 2 Default for calculation to actual Branch connection point. E.g. normal set-on tee. Calculation to the centre line of the main pipeline in ALL situations. Use co-ordinate position.

Related Program Development Specs. Extended Use Related Option Switches.

Version

Date

7.2 APR 95 7.4 DEC 95 7.6.2 MAY 96 7.14.4 JUL 98 8.7.0 APR 01

Details Switches by number Switches by name

ISSUE 3

OPT - 2

-3-

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

CUT PIECE NUMBERING / LIST TYPE


Switch Settings

2 Cont.

(Continued from previous page) Pipe Bending File

SWITCH POSITION 6 0

Pipe fabrication information including details of each cut piece, listing the length, diameter, end preparation, material part number, and other related details to assist manufacturing. In addition bending information giving distances to/between bends, angle and radius details are also output. Pipe fabrication information as described above but also including details to enable profiling the shaped ends of pipe and the cutting of holes (for tees, olets, crosses, etc). Cut Piece Enclosure Types

SWITCH POSITION 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Pointed brackets Diamond ended box Round ended box Triangular enclosure Diamond enclosure Square ended box Circular enclosure Elliptical enclosure Hexagonal ended box Single / Double line enclosure

SWITCH POSITION 8 0 1

Standard single line enclosure Double line enclosure (Circular/Elliptical enclosures only)
Version Date

Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 88B - PIPE BENDING FILE EXTENSION. Extended Use Related Option Switches.

8.7.2

JUN 01

8.10.5 NOV 02 8.11.0 APR 03

Switches by number Switches by name

ISSUE 3

OPT - 2

-4-

ALIAS

3.

Drawing trim marks

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DRAWING TRIM MARKS


Description

This Option Switch controls the generation of Trim Marks for the plotted isometric drawing. These Trim Marks indicate the extremities of the nominated drawing size (as set by either Option Switch 14 or Option Switches 15 and 16) and are used as guides when trimming the plots produced on a continuous paper type plotter.
Switch Settings

0 1

Default for No Trim Marks to be generated. Plotted Trim Marks to be generated to indicate the extremities of each plotted isometric.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Either Setting
Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches. First Introduced Extended Use Version Date

1.0

APR 83

Details

OPT - 3
Switches by number Switches by name

-5-

ALIAS

4.

Drawing text size

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DRAWING TEXT SIZE


Description

This Option Switch is used to control the physical size of the Characters that are used for Dimensions, Co-ordinates and Message Text, etc. on the 'picture section' of the isometric drawing. Note. Title Block Text which is always output using Large Characters (2.8mm) and Material List Text which is controlled either by Option Switch No. 27 or the Material List Definition File will not be affected by the setting of this Switch.
Switch Settings

SWITCH POSITION 1 & 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 10 to 99

Character Height

Default for Medium size characters - 2.4mm high. For Small size characters - 2.1mm high. For Large size characters - 2.8mm high. For Extra Large size characters - 3.5mm high. For Extra Large size characters - 4.2mm high. For Extra Large size characters - 4.9mm high. Character Height in 1/10mms

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Blank or Value Spare


Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches.

Future

0 or Value
Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

1.0 7.4

APR 83 DEC 95

Details Switches by number Switches by name

8.6.0 APR 01

ISSUE 2

OPT - 4

-6-

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DRAWING TEXT SIZE


Description

4 cont.

Controls text attributes allowing height, width, thickness and font to be user controlled. Text height can be set in 10th mm increments in a range between 1.0mm and 9.9mm. Text width can be set on 10th mm to allow the height/width ratio to be varied. Text thickness can be set. Text font can be varied, this is achieved by selecting a font from the Font Information File (Fontstd.fif).

Switch Settings

OPTION SWITCH 3 & 4 Character Width 10 to 99 Character width in mms (To be included in the future)

OPTION SWITCH 5 1 to 9

Character Thickness (Weight) (To be included in the future)

Character thickness in mms (SPARE)

OPTION SWITCH 6

OPTION SWITCH 7, 8 and 9 Number corresponding to entry in appropriate Font Information File. Set to Zero or Blank will use default font.

Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches. Extended Use

Version

Date

ISSUE 2

OPT - 4

Switches by number Switches by name

-7-

ALIAS

5.

Co-ordinates - Connection/connectivity

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

CO-ORDINATES - CONNECTION/ CONNECTIVITY


Description

This facility is for the selective suppression from the Isometric of the Co-ordinate information that is associated with each of the seven Pipeline End Connection / Termination Identifiers in -30 to -36 type records, and at any Break In Point (B.I.P.) identifier position in -47 type records. Each type is controlled by a separate position in the Option Switch as indicated in the layout below.
Switch Settings

The Co-ordinate type identifiers are :IDF PURPOSE ISO TEXT RECORD NO. Continuation on another pipeline CONT. ON -30 Connected to Equipment Nozzle Etc. CONN. TO -31 Identify any Open End of pipework User Defined Text -32 Identify any Closed End of pipework User Defined Text -33 Identify a Vent position VENT -34 Identify a Drain position DRAIN -35 Identify any miscellaneous position User Defined Text -36 Identify a Break-In Point -47 Each Option Switch position should be set to :0 For ISO TEXT (See above) and associated Co-ordinates to be shown on the isometric. 1 For ISO TEXT (See above) with No Co-ordinates to be shown on the isometric. Where appropriate, leading zeros may be omitted to give blank positions.

Switch Layout

8
-47 Rec

7
-36 Rec

6
-35 Rec

5
-34 Rec

4
-33 Rec

3
-32 Rec

2
-31 Rec

1
-30 Rec

Switch Position

Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 29 - END CO-ORDS. SUPPRESSION. DEV. NO. 47 - GHOST GAP FACILITY. Related Option Switches.

Version First Introduced Extended Use

Date

5.4 5.9

APR 87 MAR 90

Details

OPT - 5
Switches by number Switches by name

-8-

ALIAS

6.

Date output

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DATE OUTPUT
Description

This Option Switch is used to select the Date format that is to be output on the isometric drawing and printed listings in 2/4 digit year format. The actual Date that is output is taken automatically from either the Pipeline Data File that has been created by the host 3D Design System, or the Computer System Date at run time. As shown below, there are three format options plus an Option Switch setting to suppress any Date Output, even though a Date may exist in the IDF.
Switch Settings

SWITCH POSITIONS 1 & 2 - Date Output/Format. 0 Default British format - e.g. 14 APR 92 1 For European format - e.g. 14/04/92 2 For American format - e.g. 04/14/92 3 For no plotted Date to be output. 10 System Date in British format. 11 System Date in European format. 12 System Date in American format. SWITCH POSITION 3 - 2/4 Digit Year Output. 0 or Blank 1
Switch Layout

Output 2 digit year format. Output 4 digit year format (e.g. 14/04/1992).

1 0

Switch Position

0, blank or 1

All Settings
Version First Introduced Extended Use 1.0 7.1 7.16.0 Date APR 83 JUN 94 MAY 99

Related Program Development Specs. VERSION 7.0 - RELEASE NOTES DEV. NO. 74B - FOUR DIGIT YEAR Related Option Switches.

Details Switches by number Switches by name

OPT - 6

-9-

ALIAS

7.

Pipeline splitting - User control

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

PIPELINE SPLITTING - USER CONTROL


Description

Identifies the method to be used when Splitting Pipelines into multiple isometric drawings. Two methods are available :i) Automatic Splitting. The automatic Split routine calculates the volume of Pipeline graphics that can be satisfactorily displayed on the selected DRAWING SIZE, and generates the required number of isometrics to contain the complete Pipeline. ii) A fixed number of drawings. With this method the User directly dictates how many isometric drawings are to be produced for a Pipeline. Notes. a) The setting in Position 1 of this Switch will be ignored if Manual Pipeline Split Points are present in the Pipeline Data file. b) Method ii) should only be used in special cases for single Pipeline runs, since any Option Switch setting applies to all the Pipelines in a run. An added Option permits any Drawing Split Points input in the 3D model by the User and present in the Piping Data file to be ignored.

Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in two parts.

SWITCH POSITIONS 1 & 2 - Various controls. 0 Default for automatic Split Control. Value Where value is equal to the number of drawings required. (Continued overpage)
Switch Layout

Switch Position

Blank or one
Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches.

Zero or Value
Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

1.0 7.7

APR 83 AUG 96

38

Details Switches by number Switches by name

OPT - 7

- 10 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

PIPELINE SPLITTING - USER CONTROL


Description

7 Cont.

Switch Settings

(Continued from previous page)

SWITCH POSITION 3 - Ignore Drawing Split Points. 1 To have User Defined Drawing Split Points present in the Piping Data file ignored.

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Related Option Switches.

Version

Date

38

Extended Use

Details Switches by number Switches by name

OPT - 7

- 11 -

ALIAS

8.

Dimension line standout

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DIMENSION LINE STANDOUT


Description

This is a basic Option Switch for controlling Dimension Line Standout Distances for :a) String & Composite dimensions that are normally plotted as the middle layer of multi-layer dimensions. b) Dimensioned Messages, Support Dimensions and Reference dimensions on the inner layer, but only when a Standout Distance in Option Switch 40 is not set. c) Overall dimensions on the outer layer, but only when a Standout Distance in Option Switch 118 is not set. Note. Values set to < = 11 mm. will be ignored by the program and substituted by the appropriate Standard Dimension Line Standout distance. (Continued overpage)
Switch Settings

0 Value

Default for standard Dimension Line Standouts (see below). Where value equals the required Standout distance for String & Composite dimensions on the middle layer - in whole mm's .

Standard Dimension Line Standout distances are :For Small size Drawing Text (Option Switch 4 = 1) a) String / Composite Dimension Standout = 12 mm b) Messages / Support & Reference Dimension Standout = 6 mm c) Overall Dimension Standout = 18 mm (Continued over page)
Switch Layout

0
0 or 1

Switch Position

0 or Value
Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 53 - ISOPLOT PROGRAM UPDATE. V8.8.0 - RELEASE NOTES Related Option Switches.

1.0 6.0 7.4

APR 83 MAR 91 DEC 95

118

Details Switches by number Switches by name

ISSUE 2

OPT - 8

- 12 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DIMENSION LINE STANDOUT


Description

8 Cont.

(Continued from previous page) When the Option Switch value is set > 11 mm. - that value is used by the program to set the Dimension Line Standout distance for String & Composite dimensions on the middle layer. The inner dimension layer for Dimensioned Messages, Support Dimensions and Reference Dimensions will then be set to 0.5 X this distance, while the outer layer Overall Dimensions will be set to 1.5 X . (Standard Dimension Line Standout distances - continued from the previous page) For Medium size Drawing Text (Option Switch 4 = 0) a) String / Composite Dimension Standout = 14 mm b) Messages / Support & Reference Dimension Standout = 7 mm c) Overall Dimension Standout = 21 mm For Large size Drawing Text (Option Switch 4 = 2) a) String / Composite Dimension Standout = 16 mm b) Messages / Support & Reference Dimension Standout = 8 mm c) Overall Dimension Standout = 24 mm For Extra Large size Drawing Text (Option Switch 4 = 3) a) String / Composite Dimension Standout = 18 mm b) Messages / Support & Reference Dimension Standout = 9 mm c) Overall Dimension Standout = 27 mm For Extra Large size Drawing Text (Option Switch 4 = 4) a) String / Composite Dimension Standout = 20 mm b) Messages / Support & Reference Dimension Standout = 10 mm c) Overall Dimension Standout = 30 mm For Extra Large size Drawing Text (Option Switch 4 = 5) a) String / Composite Dimension Standout = 22 mm b) Messages / Support & Reference Dimension Standout = 11 mm c) Overall Dimension Standout = 33 mm

Version Extended Use

Date

8.6.0 8.8.0

APR 01 JUL 01

4
ISSUE 2

118

Details Switches by number Switches by name

OPT - 8

- 13 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DIMENSION LINE STANDOUT


Description (Continued from previous page)

8 Cont.

Dimension text and messages placed along a section of pipe in isometric projection (oblique angle \ slanted text). This feature is only available for DXF format output styles generated via the POD interface. Text oblique angle will be adjusted to be parallel to the dimension standout direction. ISOGEN will attempt to set a vertical dimension standout for horizontal sections of pipeline wherever practical. Switch Settings

SWITCH POSITION 3 - Isometric Text 0 1 Standard text Isometric text Vertical Dimension Standout

SWITCH POSITION 4 0 1

Normal selection criteria used to determine directional standout. Vertical dimension standout wherever possible.

Version Extended Use

Date

ISSUE 2

OPT - 8

Switches by number Switches by name

- 14 -

ALIAS

9.

Dimension form

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DIMENSION FORM
Description

Controls basic Dimensioning requirements on the isometric :i) Dimension Type - String/Composite, Support/Comment, Reference Location and Full String. ii) Component Dimensions to include or exclude Gaskets. iii) USA style dimensions (positioned on top of the Dimension Line). iv) Additional allowances for pipe dimensions. v) Double dimensioning - imperial or metric vi) Dimensioning Multi-way Valves and Instruments.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in eight parts. SWITCH POSITION 1 - Various Controls 0 1 Default setting which provides basic String Dimensions, Support / Message Dimensions, and Reference Dimensions. For an isometric with String Dimensions and Support/Message location Dimensions suppressed. That is, only Reference Dimensions will be plotted. For the output of Support/Message and Reference Location Dimensions only. Same as value 0 except Composite Dimensions are output instead of String. Same as value 0 except Full String Dimensions are output instead of Ordinary String Dimensions. That is, all components are individually dimensioned.
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

2 3 4

Switch Position

Switch Layout

Blank or or one

All Settings

Version Date Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 19 - IMPROVED DIMENSIONING. First APR 83 1.0 DEV. NO. 59 - DIMENSIONING UPGRADE. Introduced DEV.NO. 83F - DIMENSIONING ENHANCEMENTS Related Option118 40 Switches. 119 OCT 86 Extended 5.0 Use

Details Switches by number Switches by name

7.0

OCT 93

8.5.4

DEC 00

8.6.0 FEB 01 8.7.0 APR 01

- 15 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DIMENSION FORM
Switch Settings

9 Cont.

(Continued from previous page)

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Dimensioning of Gaskets. 0 1 2 For component dimensions not to include Gaskets. For component dimensions to include Gaskets. For separate dimensioning of Gaskets.

SWITCH POSITION 3 - USA Style Dimensions. Blank 1 Default for regular Dimensioning style. (i.e. Inserted into Dimension line). For USA Dimensioning style. (i.e. Positioned on top of Dimension line).

SWITCH POSITION 4 - Dimensions at 90 degrees 0 1 Dimensions turned 90 degrees rather than being arrowed out. (Note. 0 and 1 at Beta test stage Feb 2001.)

SWITCH POSITION 5 - Additional allowances shown with dimension output 0 For normal component dimensions. 1 For dimensions to show additional allowances. SWITCH POSITION 6 - Bend Dimensioning 0 1 Combined pipe and bend dimensions. Separate pipe and bend dimensions.

SWITCH POSITION 7 - Double dimensioning - Imperial and Metric. 0 1 For single dimensioning. For double dimensioning.

SWITCH POSITION 8 - Dimensioning of Angle / 3 Way / 4 Way Valves and Instruments 0 1 Angle / 3 Way / 4 Way Valve and Instruments dimensioned using message. Angle / 3 Way / 4 Way Valve and Instruments dimensioned normally.

Details Switches by number Switches by name

- 16 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DIMENSION FORM
Switch Settings

9 Cont.

(Continued from previous page)

SWITCH POSITION 9 - Jacket Dimension Control 0 1 Full Jacket Dimensioning Jacket Dimensioning suppressed.

Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 89D - JACKET PIPING SYSTEMS.

Extended Use

Switches by number Switches by name

- 17 -

ALIAS

10. Drawing margin - Left

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DRAWING MARGIN -LEFT


Description

10

Controls the Left Hand side Drawing Margin. The Drawing Margin is the distance between the outer edge of the Drawing Sheet and the outer line of the Drawing Frame that is being used.

Switch Settings

SWITCH POSITIONS 1, 2 & 3 - Drawing Margin - Left. 0 Value Default for 5mm, Left Hand Margin. Where value is the Left Hand Margin setting in whole mms.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Zero or Value
Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches. First Introduced Version Date

1.0

APR 83

11

12

13

Extended Use

Details

OPT - 10
Switches by number Switches by name

- 18 -

ALIAS

11. Drawing margin - Right

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DRAWING MARGIN - RIGHT


Description

11

Controls the Right Hand side Drawing Margin. The Drawing Margin is the distance between the outer edge of the Drawing Sheet and the outer line of the Drawing Frame that is being used.

Switch Settings

SWITCH POSITIONS 1, 2 & 3 - Drawing Margin - Right. 0 Value Default for 5mm, Right Hand Margin. Where value is the Right Hand Margin setting in whole mms.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Zero or Value
Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches. First Introduced Extended Use Version Date

1.0

APR 83

Details Switches by number

10

12

13
OPT - 11

Switches by name

- 19 -

ALIAS

12. Drawing margin - Top

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DRAWING MARGIN -TOP


Description

12

Controls the Drawing Margin at the Top of the drawing. The Drawing Margin is the distance between the outer edge of the Drawing Sheet and the outer line of the Drawing Frame that is being used.

Switch Settings

SWITCH POSITIONS 1, 2 & 3 - Drawing Margin - Top. 0 Value Default for 5mm, Top Margin. Where value is the Top Margin setting in whole mms.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Zero or Value
Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches. First Introduced Version Date

1.0

APR 83

10

11

13

Extended Use

Details

OPT - 12
Switches by number Switches by name

- 20 -

ALIAS

13. Drawing margin - Bottom

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DRAWING MARGIN - BOTTOM


Description

13

Controls the Drawing Margin at the Bottom of the drawing. The Drawing Margin is the distance between the outer edge of the Drawing Sheet and the outer line of the Drawing Frame that is being used.

Switch Settings

SWITCH POSITIONS 1, 2 & 3 - Drawing Margin - Bottom. 0 Value Default for 5mm, Bottom Margin. Where value is the Bottom Margin setting in whole mms.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Zero or Value
Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches. First Introduced Version Date

1.0

APR 83

10

11

12

Extended Use

Details

OPT - 13
Switches by number Switches by name

- 21 -

ALIAS

14. Drawing size - Standard postscript plotter size

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DRAWING SIZE - STANDARD POSTSCRIPT PLOTTER SIZE


Description

14

Controls Drawing Size when a standard one conforming to the European Metric 'A' series or an Inch based American ANSI paper sizes 'A' to 'E' is required. A secondary function controlled by this Option Switch is the setting of the Postscript output device size for both standard and non-standard Drawing Sizes. Note. Non-standard Drawing Sizes are controlled by Option Switches 15 & 16 which if set overrides any setting in Option Switch 14.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in two parts.

SWITCH POSITIONS 1 & 2 - Drawing Sheet Size. 0 1 2 3 4 10 5 6 7 8 9 Default for European A2 paper size (420 x 594 mm). For European A1 paper size (594 x 841 mm). For European A2 paper size (420 x 594 mm). For European A3 paper size (297 x 420 mm). For European A4 paper size (210 x 297 mm). For European A0 paper size (841 x 1189 mm). For ANSI 'D' paper size (22" x 34"). For ANSI 'C' paper size (17" x 22"). For ANSI 'B' paper size (11" x 17"). For ANSI 'A' paper size (8.1/2" x 11"). For ANSI 'E' paper size (34" x 44"). (Continued over page)
Switch Layout

Switch Position

Blank or Value
Related Program Development Specs. VERSION 6.0 - RELEASE NOTES. Related Option Switches.

Zero or Value
Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

1.0 6.0

APR 83 MAR 91

Details

OPT - 14
Switches by number Switches by name

- 22 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DRAWING SIZE -STANDARD POSTSCRIPT PLOTTER SIZE


Description

14 Cont.

Switch Settings

(Continued from previous page)

SWITCH POSITIONS 3 & 4 - PostScript Plotter size. 0 or blank For Default European A3 paper size (297 x 420 mm). 1 2 3 4 10 5 6 7 8 9 For European A1 paper size (594 x 841 mm). For European A2 paper size (420 x 594 mm). For European A3 paper size (297 x 420 mm). For European A4 paper size (210 x 297 mm). For European A0 paper size (841 x 1189 mm). For ANSI 'D' paper size (22" x 34"). For ANSI 'C' paper size (17" x 22"). For ANSI 'B' paper size (11" x 17"). For ANSI 'A' paper size (8.1/2" x 11"). For ANSI 'E' paper size (34" x 44").

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Related Option Switches. Extended Use

Version

Date

Details

OPT - 14
Switches by number Switches by name

- 23 -

ALIAS

15. Drawing size - Height

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DRAWING SIZE -HEIGHT


Description

15

Defines isometric Drawing Height for non-standard paper sizes. That is, sizes that do Not conform to either the European 'A' series, or the Inch based American ANSI sizes. Notes. 1) Where the plotted output is to a PostScript output device, the device size must be set in Option Switch 14 (unless European A3 size is being used). 2) Standard drawing sizes are controlled by Option Switch 14.

Switch Settings

SWITCH POSITIONS 1, 2, 3 & 4 - Drawing Size - Height. 0 Value Default for No non-standard Drawing Height. Where value is the overall Drawing Height in whole mms.

(This Option Switch MUST be used in conjunction with Option Switch 16 - DRAWING SIZE - WIDTH).

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Zero or Value
Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches. First Introduced Version Date

1.0

APR 83

14

16

Extended Use

Details

OPT - 15
Switches by number Switches by name

- 24 -

ALIAS

16. Drawing size - Width

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DRAWING SIZE -WIDTH


Description

16

Defines isometric Drawing Width for non-standard paper sizes. That is, sizes that do Not conform to either the European 'A' series, or the Inch based American ANSI sizes. Notes. 1) Where the plotted output is to a PostScript output device, the device size must be set in Option Switch 14 (unless European A3 size is being used). 2) Standard drawing sizes are controlled by Option Switch 14.

Switch Settings

SWITCH POSITIONS 1, 2, 3 & 4 - Drawing Size - Width. 0 Value Default for No non-standard Drawing Width. Where value is the overall Drawing Width in whole mms.

(This Option Switch MUST be used in conjunction with Option Switch 15 - DRAWING SIZE - HEIGHT).

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Zero or Value
Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches. First Introduced Version Date

1.0

APR 83

14

15

Extended Use

Details

OPT - 16
Switches by number Switches by name

- 25 -

ALIAS

17. Flow arrows - Components

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

FLOW ARROWS -COMPONENTS


Description

17

This Option Switch controls the use of Flow Arrows that are plotted alongside certain types of in-line components. Their purpose is to show the Pipeline's Fluid or Gas Flow direction. Note. A different type of User positioned Flow Arrow which is plotted directly on the pipe may also be used, either as well as, or instead of the component Flow Arrow. For details of this alternative type, see Option Switch 112.
Switch Settings

0 1

Default to obtain Flow Arrows plotted alongside certain types of in-line components. To suppress the plotting of component Flow Arrows.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Either Setting
Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches. First Introduced Extended Use Version Date

1.0

APR 83

Details

OPT - 17
Switches by number Switches by name

- 26 -

ALIAS

18. Drawing frame - Program standard

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DRAWING FRAME PROGRAM STANDARD


Description

18

Controls whether or not the standard ISOGEN Drawing Frame is plotted. It is likely that Users who either plot their own design of Backing Frame or plot to Frames on pre-printed forms, will wish to suppress the plotting of the standard ISOGEN Drawing Frame.

Switch Settings

0 1

Default to obtain the standard ISOGEN Drawing Frame. To suppress the plotting of the ISOGEN Drawing Frame.

Switch Layout

1 0

Switch Position

Either Setting
Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches. First Introduced Extended Use Version Date

1.0

APR 83

Details

OPT - 18
Switches by number Switches by name

- 27 -

ALIAS

19. Sloping pipeline indication method

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SLOPING PIPELINE INDICATION METHOD


Description

19

This Option Switch controls how sections of Falling Pipelines (that is downward slopes) are to be indicated on the isometric. The switch determines the method of how the Fall value is to be indicated numerically on the isometric from one of the options shown below. A further option is to suppress Fall type slope indication.
Switch Settings

Switch Position 1 - Fall depiction 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Default for Falls shown as an Angle. e.g. FALL 1.5. For Falls shown as a Ratio. e.g. FALL 1:38. For Falls shown as a Percentage. e.g. FALL 2.6%. For Falls shown as a Gradient. e.g. FALL 1.6 GRAD. For Falls shown as an Imperial Incline. e.g. 5/16" PER FOOT. For Falls shown as a Metric Incline. e.g. FALL 26 MM PER M. To suppress Falling Line indication.

Switch Layout

1 0

Switch Position

Blank, 1, 2 or 3
Related Program Development Specs. NONE

All Settings

(Continued over page)


Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

20

1.0 8.11.0

APR 83 APR 03

Related Option Switches.

Details Switches by number Switches by name

OPT - 19

- 28 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SLOPING PIPELINE INDICATION METHOD


Description

19 Cont.

Switch 19 Position 2, now gives the user greater control over the accuracy of sloping pipeline indication. (The settings in Position 2 are governed by how the fall is to be indicated once the data has been entered in Position 1. )
Switch Settings

(Continued from previous page)

Switch Position 2 - Accuracy of sloping pipeline indication. Fall shown as an Angle 0 1 2 3 Angle output to nearest 10th degree Angle output to nearest degree Angle output to nearest 100th degree Angle output to nearest degree and minutes

Fall shown as an Ratio 0 1 2 Ratio output to nearest 5 when greater than 1:30 Ratio output to nearest 5 when greater than 1:100 Ratio output to nearest 1

Fall shown as an Percentage 0 1 2 Percentage output to nearest whole value Percentage output to nearest 1 decimal place Percentage output to nearest 2 decimal places

(Continued over page)


Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches. First Introduced Extended Use Version Date

1.0 8.11.0

APR 83 APR 03

OPT - 19

Switches by number Switches by name

- 29 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SLOPING PIPELINE INDICATION METHOD


Switch Settings

19 Cont.

(Continued from previous page)

Switch Position 2 - Accuracy of sloping pipeline indication contd. Fall shown as an Gradient 0 1 2 Gradient output to nearest 10th grad Gradient output to nearest grad Gradient output to nearest 100th grad

Fall shown as an Imperial Incline (only when dimensions in decimal inches) 0 1 Incline output to nearest 16th of an inch per foot Incline output to nearest 100th of an inch per foot

Fall shown as an Metric Incline 0 1 2 Incline output to nearest 5mms per metre Incline output to nearest mm per metre Incline to nearest 10mms per metre

Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches. First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

1.0 8.11.0

APR 83 APR 03

OPT - 19

Switches by number Switches by name

- 30 -

ALIAS

20. Sloping pipeline indication limit

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SLOPING PIPELINE INDICATION LIMIT


Description

20

This switch controls the cut-off value to be used when determining what steepness of Slope should be treated as a Fall, and what should not. Note. Slopes steeper than the cut-off value will be shown with a 2D or 3D Box or Triangle skew indication as appropriate.

Switch Settings

0 Value e.g.

Default for 5 angle cut-off or it's equivalent depending upon the type of indication selected in Option Switch 19. Where Value is set to a cut-off number to suit the type of indication selected in Option Switch 19. For 5 Degrees cut off enter 5 or 0 For 1:11 Ratio cut-off enter 11 For 9 Percent cut-off enter 9 For 5 Grads. cut-off enter 5 For 1" Per Foot cut-off enter 1 For 88 mm. per Metre cut-off enter 88

Note. This Option Switch should always be set to 0 when Sloping Pipeline Indication has been suppressed by setting Option Switch 19 to 6.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Zero or Value
Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches. First Introduced Extended Use Version Date

1.0

APR 83

19

Details

OPT - 20
Switches by number Switches by name

- 31 -

ALIAS

21. Isometric type

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

ISOMETRIC TYPE
Description

21

Controls the required Isometric Type. There are many variations, as defined below. The default option provides a Combined isometric containing a combination of Fabrication, Erection and Offshore information as appropriate.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in two parts.

SWITCH POSITIONS 1 & 2 - Isometric Type. 0 1 2 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 16 Default for a Combined isometric (see above). For an Erection / Offshore type isometric. For a Fabrication only isometric. For individual Flat Spool isometrics. (Maximum legs Flat). For individual Flat Spool isometrics. (Maximum legs Parallel). For individual Spool isometrics - 'As Built' orientation. For isometric Suppression - No isometric drawings generated. For a Combined Material List only, without Pipeline graphics. For an Erection Material List only, without Pipeline graphics. For a Fabrication Material List only, without Pipeline graphics. For Spool Material List only, without Spool graphics. (Continued over page)
3 2 1

Switch Layout

Switch Position

All All Settings Settings


Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 63A - FLAT SPOOLS FACILITY. DEV. NO. 74A - DISCONNECTED PIPELINES Related Option Switches. Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

1.0 7.1 7.4.2

APR 83 JUN 94 JAN 96

55
ISSUE 2

7.16.0 MAY 99

Details

OPT - 21
Switches by number Switches by name

- 32 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

ISOMETRIC TYPE
Description

21 Cont.

Switch Settings

(Continued from previous page)

SWITCH POSITION 3 - Test Isometric. Blank Generate normal isometric. 1 Generate a Test Isometric with all dimensions and Material List quantities output as Xs. Does not decrement the Hardware Lock count. 8 Increase tolerance to join disconnected components - set to 8mm. See note below. 9 Produce separate drawings for disconnected pipeline when increased tolerance used and switch 55, digit 3 set to 0. See note below. Notes Value 8 and 9 are set internally and will not require the user to take any action. When a Minor break occurs at the By-pass closure point then IDFGEN will set position 3 to a value of 8 so that ISOGEN will still recognise the By-pass situation that has been created. A value of 9 will be set by IDFGEN in position 3 when certain conditions of Switch 55 are met. ISOGEN will act upon this information to output the Disconnected Pipeline message as and when required.

Switch Position 3 = 8

Switch Position 3 = 9

Switch Layout Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Related Option Switches. Extended Use Version Date

Details

ISSUE 2

OPT - 21

Switches by number Switches by name

- 33 -

ALIAS

22. Cut piece add-on allowance

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

CUT PIECE ADD-ON ALLOWANCES


Description

22

This switch controls the amount of extra Pipe that is added for the following circumstances :1) At Loose Flange and Field Fit Weld (FFW) positions. Extra Pipe is added both to Cut Pipe Length dimensions and to Pipe quantities on the Material List. There are separate controls for On-shore and Off-shore values. 2) For Shop Test purposes where certain Welds are cut-off together with a short length of pipe after testing.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in three parts.

SWITCH POSITIONS 1, 2 & 3 - FFW/Loose Flange Allowance, On-shore. 0 Default to obtain 0 mm. allowance. Value Where Value is an alternative allowance in whole mm's. e.g. 175. SWITCH POSITIONS 4, 5 & 6 - FFW/Loose Flange Allowance, Off-shore. 0 or blank Default to obtain 0 mm. allowance. Value Where Value is an alternative allowance in whole mm's. e.g. 175. SWITCH POSITIONS 7, 8 & 9 - Shop Test Weld Allowance. Blank Default to obtain 0 mm. allowance. Value Where Value is an alternative allowance in whole mm's. e.g. 175. This is applied only to 'SHOP TEST' Welds.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Blank or Value

Zero, blank or Value

Zero or Value
Version Date

Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 57 - WELDING FACILITIES UPGRADE. First DEV. NO. 63 - FLAT SPOOL FACILITY. Introduced Extended Use

1.0 7.0 7.1

APR 83 OCT 93 FEB 94

Details

OPT - 22
Switches by number Switches by name

- 34 -

ALIAS

23. Material list - Controls and File type

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

MATERIAL LIST - CONTROLS MATERIAL LIST - FILE TYPE


Description

23

Controls the following integral Material List functions on the isometric. i) Material List On/Off ii) Special Type of List. iii) Material List Style. iv) Material Control File Type. v) Continuous or Sectionalised type of Material List. Users who obtain the Material List by other means, for example by printing it, or who do not require a Material List at all, may suppress it.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in five parts. SWITCH POSITION 1 - Material List On/Off. 0 Default to have the Material List plotted integrally with the isometric drawing. 1 To suppress the Plotted Material List. SWITCH POSITION 2 - Special Type Material Lists. 0 Default for no Special Type Material List. 1 Special Type Material List - every item is given a separate entry except Gaskets & Bolts which are accumulated, Pulled Bends get 'U' pre-fixes, Welds have W or B pre-fixes. 2 No Special Type Material List, but use an alpha system of Material List pointers, A, B, C etc. instead of the default numeric system. (Continued overpage)

Switch Layout

Switch Position

All Settings
Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 56 - USER DEFINED MATERIAL LIST. First Introduced Related Option Switches. Version Date

1.0 7.0 7.4

APR 83 OCT 93 DEC 95

24 25 26 27 28 29 30 65 74
ISSUE 2

Extended Use

Details Switches by number Switches by name

OPT - 23

- 35 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

MATERIAL LIST - CONTROLS MATERIAL LIST - FILE TYPE


Description

23 Cont.

Switch Settings

(Continued from previous page)

SWITCH POSITION 3 - Material List Style. 0 or 1 Default for Style 1 Material List. 2 For Style 2 Material List. 3 For Style 3 Material List. 4 For Style 4 Material List. SWITCH POSITION 4 - Type of Material Control File. 0 Default for Standard Material Control File. 1 For User Defined Material Control File. SWITCH POSITION 5 - Style 2 Material List Layout pattern. (Also works with Special Type Material List options - OS23 Pos 2 = 1). Blank Default for the standard Sectionalised type with Group Headings & Component sub-Group Headings. 1 For Continuous style listing without headings & Sub-headings. This type of list is partitioned with horizontal dividing lines between the logical Groups, e.g. PIPE, FLANGES, FITTINGS, etc. 2 Same as value 1 except there are no dividing lines.

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Related Option Switches.

Version

Date

24 25 26 27 28 29 30 65 74
ISSUE 2

Extended Use

7.6

MAY 96

Details

OPT - 23
Switches by number Switches by name

- 36 -

ALIAS

24. Material list - Pipeline/drawing and Pipeline length units

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

MATERIAL LIST - PIPELINE / DRAWING MATERIAL LIST - PIPE LENGTH UNITS


Description

24

This Option Switch controls two aspects of the Material List. i) Whether it is produced on a per Drawing or per Pipeline basis. (This difference only comes into effect when a Pipeline is split onto two or more drawings). ii) Linear Quantity output style.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in two parts.

SWITCH POSITION 1 - Material List per Drawing or per Pipeline. 0 1 2 Default for Material List per isometric drawing. For Material List per Pipeline. Spool isometric Material Part Numbers to match Full isometric Part Numbers when using Material List per Drawing facility. Spool isometric Material Part Numbers to match Full isometric Part Numbers when using Material List per Pipeline facility.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Blank or Zero or Value Value


Related Program Development Specs.
DEV. NO. 56 - USER DEFINED MATERIAL LIST.

Version First Introduced

Date

1.0 7.0 7.6.2

APR 83 OCT 93 MAY 96

Extended O.S. 23 O.S. 24 0.S. 25 0.S. 26 0.S. 27 O.S. 28 O.S. 29 O.S. 30 Use

Related Option Switches.

Details Switches by number Switches by name

ISSUE 2

OPT - 24

- 33 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

MATERIAL LIST - PIPELINE / DRAWING MATERIAL LIST - PIPE LENGTH UNITS


Switch Settings

24 cont

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Linear Quantity Output Style. Blank 1 2 3 Default for pipe length to be output in the form n.n M or n.n Feet. E.g. 10.4 M or 10.4. For pipe length to be output in the form n MM or n Feet n Inches. E.g. 1040 MM or 10 5 . For pipe length to be output in the form n.nnn M or n.nnn Feet. E.g. 1.045 M or 10.375. For pipe length output to match form specified in O.S. 41. The selected length style is applied on the Material List for Pipe material entries and miscellaneous components, and on the CL length summary. (Metric or Imperial units output is governed by O.S. 41).

Related Option Switches.

Extended Use

8.10.5 NOV 02

ISSUE 2

OPT - 24

Switches by number Switches by name

- 34 -

ALIAS

25. Material list and Title block- position

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

MATERIAL LIST - POSITION TITLE BLOCK - POSITION


Description

25

This Option Switch controls two aspects of the Material List. i) Whether the Material List is printed on the Left Hand or Right Hand side of the isometric. ii) The position of the Title Block.

Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in two parts.

SWITCH POSITION 1 - Material List position. 0 Default for Material List printed on the Left Hand side. 1 For Material List printed on the Right Hand side.

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Title Block position. Blank For Title Block in default position. (Bottom Right Hand corner of pipeline drawing area). 1 For Title Block at bottom of Material List. 2 For Title Block to be suppressed.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Blank or Zero or Value Value


Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 56 - USER DEFINED MATERIAL LIST. First Introduced Related Option Switches. Version Date

1.0 7.0

APR 83 OCT 93

23

24

26

27

28

29

30

Extended Use

Details

OPT - 25
Switches by number Switches by name

- 35 -

ALIAS

26. Material list - Descriptions

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

MATERIAL LIST - DESCRIPTIONS


Description

26

This Option Switch controls whether or not Item Descriptions are printed on the Material List and in the Bulk Materials file. Note. When Item Descriptions are suppressed, the Material List becomes correspondingly narrower. Also controlled is the option of whether or not to have a Blank Line printed after single line Material List entries.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in three parts. SWITCH POSITION 1 - Item Descriptions On / Off control. 0 Default to have Item Descriptions printed. 1 To suppress Item Descriptions. SWITCH POSITION 2 - Control of the insertion of Blank Lines following single line Material List entries. 0 or blank Default to have Blank Lines inserted. 1 Not have Blank Lines inserted following single line entries. This provides the possibility of the Material List being shorter. SWITCH POSITION 3 - Output of Descriptions in Bulk Material file. Blank 1 2 Default for no Descriptions. No repeat Descriptions to be output. All Descriptions to be output.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Either Setting
Related Program Development Specs. VERSION 7.0 - RELEASE NOTES. Related Option Switches. First Introduced Version Date

1.0 7.1 7.14.4

APR 83 JUN 94 JUL 98

23

24

25

27

28

29

30

Extended Use

Details

ISSUE 3

OPT - 26
Switches by number Switches by name

- 36 -

ALIAS

27. Material list - Text size

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

MATERIAL LIST - TEXT SIZE


Description

27

This Option Switch controls the plotted Material List Text Size. A range of sizes are available, as listed below.

Switch Settings

SWITCH POSITION 1 & 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 10 to 99

Character Height

Default for Medium size characters - 2.4mm high. For Small size characters - 2.1mm high. For Large size characters - 2.8mm high. For Extra Large size characters - 3.5mm high. For Extra Large size characters - 4.2mm high. For Extra Large size characters - 4.9mm high. Character Height in 1/10mms

Switch Layout

Switch Position

All Settings
Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches. First Introduced Version Date

1.0 7.4

APR 83 DEC 95

23

24

25

26

28

29

30

Extended Use

Details

ISSUE 2

OPT - 27
Switches by number Switches by name

- 37 -

ALIAS

28. Material list - Item code length

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

MATERIAL LIST - ITEM CODE LENGTH


Description

28

This Option Switch informs ISOGEN of how many characters should be used for the Material List Item Code.

Switch Settings

0 Value

Default for 8 characters in the Item Code. Where Value is an alternative number of characters. e.g. 12.

Notes. a) The maximum number of permissible Item Code characters is 29. b) A value of 0 gives 8 characters, it does Not cause the suppression of the Item Code field on the Style 1 Material List. c) Changes in this field causes the Material List to be correspondingly wider or narrower.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Zero or Value
Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches. First Introduced Version Date

1.0

APR 83

23

24

25

26

27

29

30

Extended Use

Details

OPT - 28
Switches by number Switches by name

- 38 -

ALIAS

29. Material list - Line spacing

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

MATERIAL LIST - LINE SPACING


Description

29

This Option Switch controls the Line Spacing distance on a plotted Material List.

Switch Settings

0 or 100 Value

Default corresponding to a Line Spacing value of 100. Where Value is an alternative number. Set to increase / decrease the Line Spacing distance in the ratio Value / 100. e.g. A Value of 90 will reduce the Line Spacing while a Value of 110 will increase it.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Zero or Value
Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches. First Introduced Version Date

1.0

APR 83

23

24

25

26

27

28

30

Extended Use

Details

OPT - 29
Switches by number Switches by name

- 39 -

ALIAS

30. Material list - Continuation method

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

MATERIAL LIST CONTINUATION METHOD


Description

30

Controls how a Material List Overflow situation is handled and how any Overflow drawing is to be identified. A secondary option offers control over the Drawing (Sheet) identification method to be used for single isometric pipelines.

Switch Settings

Default to give automatic overflow onto a second Material List plotted alongside the first. (This creates a wider non-standard drawing size). Gives a second 'Dummy' isometric containing the Overflow Material List but no pipeline graphics. This isometric will be allocated the next Drawing (Sheet) identifier in the sequence. Gives a second 'Dummy' isometric containing the Overflow Material List but no pipeline graphics. The isometric will be allocated the same Drawing (Sheet) identifier as the previous (Master) isometric but supplemented with a 'A' suffix letter. Any further overflow drawings for the same Master isometric will be suffixed 'B' 'C' etc. (Continued overpage)

Switch Layout

Switch Position

All Settings
Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 48 - REPEATABILITY - PHASE 1. Related Option Switches. First Introduced Extended Use Version Date

1.0 5.9

APR 83 MAR 90

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

Details Switches by number Switches by name

OPT - 30

- 40 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

MATERIAL LIST CONTINUATION METHOD


Description

30 Contd.

Switch Settings

(Contd. from previous page)

10 11 12

Gives the same as value 0 except that DRG 1 OF 1 is added to any single sheet isometrics for identification. Gives the same as value 1 except that DRG 1 OF 1 is added to any single sheet isometrics for identification. Gives the same as value 2 except that DRG 1 OF 1 is added to any single sheet isometrics for identification.

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Related Option Switches.

Version

Date

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

Extended Use

Details Switches by number Switches by name

OPT - 30

- 41 -

ALIAS

31. Drawing output - File/screen

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DRAWING OUTPUT - FILE / SCREEN


Description

31

Controls how and where any isometric drawing are to be output. Controls whether or not plot files previously created can be overwritten if their names match those currently being created.
Switch Settings

SWITCH POSITION 1 0 Default for isometric drawings generated during a run to be output to either a single plot file or a series of plot files depending upon the PLOTFILE LENGTH value set in O.S. 1. For an individual plot file to be generated for each isometric drawing. For output of the generated isometric drawing(s) to the workstation screen. The Terminal Type being used should be set in O.S. 69. For output of multiple isometric drawings on separate sheets. Valid only for SmartSketch IGR & SmartPlant Shape2D formats.

1 2

SWITCH POSITION 2 0 1
Switch Layout

Allocate next available plot file, generate name using selected sequence method. Allocate Plotfile name using selected sequence method after deleting previously generated files. 2 1 Switch Position

0
Blank or 1
Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches. O.S. 1 O.S. 36 O.S. 37 O.S. 69 O.S. 71

0 or value
Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

1.0 8.7.0

APR 83 APR 01

8.10.0 MAY 02

Details Switches by number Switches by name

OPT - 31

- 42 -

ALIAS

32. Drawing output - scaling

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DRAWING OUTPUT - SCALING


Description

32

This Option Switch permits the increase or decrease of the final plotted isometric size and thus change it from that defined by Option Switches 14, or 15 & 16.

Switch Settings

0 or 100

For No Scaling change (100% of set size). This generates isometrics at the size set in either Option Switch 14, or a combination of Option Switches 15 & 16. Where Value is set to increase or decrease the final isometric size in the ratio Value / 100. e.g. Value = 71 would generate a Reduced size drawing at 71% of the set size, (for example A2 reduced to A3). Value = 120 would generate an Increased size drawing at 120% of the set size.

Value

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Zero or Value
Related Program Development Specs. VERSION 6.0 RELEASE NOTES. Related Option Switches. First Introduced Extended Use Version Date

1.0 6.0

APR 83 MAR 91

14

15

16

Details

OPT - 32
Switches by number Switches by name

- 43 -

ALIAS

33. Revision/detailed marker

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

REVISION / DETAILED MARKER


Description

33

This Option Switch is used by some 3D Design Systems to control the updating of their 'Pipe Detailed' and / or 'Pipe Revision' database attribute fields on the successful production of a pipeline isometric by ISOGEN. Note. This Option Switch has no effect on any output generated by the ISOGEN system.
Switch Settings

0 1 2 3

Default to Suppress the updating of both the Revision & Detailed indicators. For both the Revision and Detailed fields to be updated. For Revision only to be updated. For Detailed only to be updated.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

All Settings
Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches. First Introduced Extended Use Version Date

1.0

APR 83

OPT - 33

Switches by number Switches by name

- 44 -

ALIAS

34. Drawing output - Picture scale

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DRAWING OUTPUT - PICTURE SCALE


Description

34

Used to increase or decrease the Scale of the pipeline 'picture' part of the isometric only, while leaving all other parts (that is, Drawing Frame, Material List, Title Block and Line Summary areas) un-altered. By use of this Option Switch the whole of the pipeline picture and all text pointing to it may be re-scaled to make it larger or smaller.

Switch Settings

0 or 100 Value

Default to give the normal Picture Scaling. (100%). Where Value is set to increase or decrease the Scaling effect in the ratio Value / 100.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Zero or Value
Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches. First Introduced Extended Use Version Date

1.0

APR 83

Details

OPT - 34

Switches by number Switches by name

- 45 -

ALIAS

35. Drawing - Reserved areas

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DRAWING - RESERVED AREAS


Description

35

This Option Switch may be used to create two Reserved 'No Go' areas across the bottom part of the isometric. One is across the bottom of the drawing region itself, while the other is across the bottom of the Material List. Once set, ISOGEN will not automatically plot any information in these areas. They are basically reserved areas on the Drawing Frame for the inclusion on the finished drawing of related Project / Pipeline information. The Frame Text Positioning facility may be used to add information that is included in the Pipeline input data file in these areas.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in two parts. SWITCH POSITIONS 1, 2 & 3 - Reserved Area within the Drawing Region. 0 Default for No Reserved Area. Value Where Value is equal to the depth of the required Reserved Area along the bottom of the isometric, measured in whole mm.'s up from the outer line of the drawing frame. SWITCH POSITIONS 4, 5 & 6 - Reserved Area at the bottom of the Material List. Blank Default for No Reserved Area. Value Where Value is equal to the depth of the required Reserved Area along the bottom of the Material List measured in whole mm.'s up from the outer line of the drawing frame.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Blank or Value
Related Program Development Specs.

Zero or Value
Version Date

DEV. NO. 56 - USER DEFINED MATERIAL LIST. First Introduced Related Option Switches.

1.0 7.0

APR 83 OCT 94

13

Extended Use

Details

OPT - 35

Switches by number Switches by name

- 46 -

ALIAS

36. Drawing output - Stacking value

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DRAWING OUTPUT - STACKING VALUE


Description

36

This Option Switch controls the number of Drawing Stacking rows within a plot file containing multi-drawings. Depending upon the drawing size, orientation, and width of the plotter paper, Drawing Stacking may be one, two, three or more rows high.

Switch Settings

0 or 1 Value

Default for 1 drawing high Stacking. All drawings will be plotted side-by-side within the plotfile. Where Value is an alternative setting. e.g. 2 for 2 frame high Stacking, 3 for 3 frame high, etc.

Note. This Option Switch must be set to 0 or 1 when using the Output to graphics screen facility.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Zero or Value
Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches. First Introduced Version Date

1.0

APR 83

31

37

Extended Use

Details

OPT - 36
Switches by number Switches by name

- 47 -

ALIAS

37. Drawing output - Stacking orientation

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DRAWING OUTPUT STACKING ORIENTATION


Description

37

This Option Switch controls the Orientation of the drawings within the plotfile. If required, to make the most economical use of plotter paper, Drawings may be set to run Along or Across the paper. (Along being defined as running the length of the roll of plotter paper).
Switch Settings

0 1

Default for plotting Along the roll of paper . For plotting Across the roll of paper .

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Either Setting
Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches. First Introduced Extended Use Version Date

1.0

APR 83

36

Details

OPT - 37

Switches by number Switches by name

- 48 -

ALIAS

38. Pipeline splitting - Automatic

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

PIPELINE SPLITTING - AUTOMATIC


Description

38

Controls Automatic Pipeline Splitting. The amount of piping information that can be accommodated on a single drawing is limited. Once the limit is exceeded, then pipeline splitting automatically occurs. By use of this Option Switch, users may either increase the information content on each drawing , or alternatively, reduce the content. Allows the Pipeline Name to output with the continuation message.
Switch Settings

Switch Position 1 to 3 - Drawing information content limit 0 or 100 Default for what ISOGEN considers to be the limit for drawing information content. The limit is set within the program and varies for each size of drawing. Where value is set to increase or decrease the drawing information content in the ratio Value / 100.

Value

Switch Position 4 - Pipeline Name output 0 1


Switch Layout

Standard Drawing Continuation Message Drawing Continuation Message includes Pipeline Name
3 2

Switch Position

Bank or 1
Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches.

Zero or Value
Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

1.0 8.11.0

APR 83 APR 03

Details

OPT - 38

Switches by number Switches by name

- 49 -

ALIAS

39. Spool piece identifiers

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SPOOL PIECE IDENTIFIERS


Description

39

Spool Identifiers permit the unique identification of each pipe Spool on the isometric drawing. There are several different formats available, as listed below. Note. The presence of a record in a Pipeline Dat file to denote a User defined Spool Identifier causes the value in Positions 1 & 2 of this Option Switch to be totally ignored. An additional control allows various box enclosures for the Spool Identifier. Control whether Unions should be a spool split point.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in 7 parts.

SWITCH POSITION 1 - Basic control. 0 1 2 Default for Spool Identifiers to be switched On, using a numeric system. Causes the output of Spool Identifiers to be suppressed. As for value 0 but use an alpha system of A, B, C etc. (Continued overpage)
Switch Layout

Switch Position

All Settings

Zero or one

All Settings

Zero or one

All Zero Settings or one

All Settings

Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 48 - ISOMETRIC REPEATABILITY. VERSION 7.0 - RELEASE NOTES. VERSION 8.8.0 - RELEASE NOTES DEV. NO. 89H - MESSAGE ENCLOSURES ELLIPSES & DOUBLE CIRCLES Related Option Switches. First Use Extended Use

Version

Date

1.0

7.1 7.12 7.4 7.14.5 8.5.1 SEP 00 8.8.0 JUL 01 8.10.0 MAY 02

APR 83 JUN 94 DEC 95 JAN 98

Details Switches by number Switches by name

ISSUE 3

OPT - 39

- 50 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SPOOL PIECE IDENTIFIERS


Switch Settings

39 Cont.
(Continued from previous page)

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Spool Identifier sequence. 0 1 For the current Spool Identifier sequence to continue onto each new drawing. Causes Spool Identifiers to re-commence at 1 on each new drawing.

SWITCH POSITION 3 - Box enclosure style. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 Default for Spool Identifiers to be enclosed in the standard square brackets or a Double box enclosure. Enclosure to be a Diamond ended box. Enclosure to be a Round ended box. Enclosure to be a Triangle shaped box. * Enclosure to be a Diamond shaped box. * Enclosure to be a Square ended box. Enclosure to be circular. No enclosure. Elliptical Spool Number enclosure.

* Because these two enclosures cannot be elongated there is a limit on the number of characters that can be accommodated, depending upon character size. SWITCH POSITION 4 - Spool Drawing Identifier (User). 0 1 Default for Pipeline reference to be prefixed to Spool ID. Output for Spool Drawing Identifier to be Pipeline Reference - User Spool ID if any User Defined Spool IDs are found in the input pipeline data file.

Details

ISSUE 3

OPT - 39

Switches by number Switches by name

- 51 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SPOOL PIECE IDENTIFIERS


Switch Settings

39 Cont.
(Continued from previous page)

SWITCH POSITION 5 - Spool Drawing Identifier (Automatic). 0 1 Spool Drawing Identifier to be Spool ID. Output for Spool Drawing Identifier to be Pipeline Reference - Automatic Spool ID if no User defined Spool IDs are found in the input pipeline data file. Spool Identifier generated from Pipeline File Name - Automatic Spool ID

SWITCH POSITION 6 - Spool Identifiers (Fabrication). 0 1 2 Do not allocate Spool Identifiers for lone fabrication components. Allocate Spool Identifiers for lone fabrication components. User controlled Pipe Spools only - no automatically generated spools.

SWITCH POSITION 7 - Spool Break Points at Unions 0 1 A Fabrication union connecting fabrication components will create separate spools. A Fabrication union connecting fabrication components will not create separate spools.

SWITCH POSITION 8 - Single/Double line Circular Spool Number Enclosures 0 1 Single line Spool Number Enclosure. Double line Spool Number Enclosure (use with circular enclosure to get double circles).

SWITCH POSITION 9 - Circular & Elliptical Spool Number Enclosure Size 0 Spool Number circular or elliptical enclosures fixed to 2 characters. 1 to 8 Spool Number circular or elliptical enclosures fixed to value set. 9 Spool Number circular or elliptical enclosures variable sizes.
Extended Use

8.11.0

APR 03

Details Switches by number Switches by name

ISSUE 3

OPT - 39

- 52 -

ALIAS

40. Pipe supports

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

PIPE SUPPORTS
Description

40

This Option Switch controls the following Pipe Support functions :a) Support Dimension type - String or Overall dimensions. b) Whether or not Pipe Supports are shown on the isometric. c) Support Dimension Stand-Out position. The Support Dimension may either be on the same side of the pipe as the normal pipe dimensions, or on the opposite side. d) The Support Dimension Line Stand-Out distance. e) Category of Supports to be dimensioned.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in four parts. SWITCH POSITION 1 - Pipe Support Dimension Type and Support Suppression. 0 Default for Pipe Supports to be drawn on the isometric and dimensioned in String form. 1 For Pipe Supports to be drawn on the isometric and dimensioned in Overall form. 2 3 To Suppress Pipe Supports on the isometric and on the Material List. For Pipe Supports to be drawn on the isometric but to be un-dimensioned. (Continued overpage)

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Blank or Value
Related Program Development Specs.

All Settings
Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

DEV. NO. 53 ISOPLOT PROGRAM UPDATE. Related Option Switches. O.S. 8 O.S. 9 8 9

1.0 6.0 7.4

APR 83 MAR 91 DEC 95

Details

ISSUE 3

OPT - 40
Switches by number Switches by name

- 53 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

PIPE SUPPORTS
Description

40 Contd.

Switch Settings

(Contd. from previous page)

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Support Dimension Position. 0 or blank Default for Support Dimensions to be drawn on the same side of the pipe as the normal dimensions. Support Dimensions drawn on the opposite side of the pipeline 1 to the normal dimensions. (This causes any Dimension Line Stand-Out Distance set in Switch Positions 3&4 to be ignored). SWITCH POSITIONS 3 & 4 - Support Dimension Line Stand-Out Distance. 0 or blank No Support Dimension Line Stand-Out Distance set. Program default will be used for all Support Dimensions. Value equals the required Support Dimension Line Stand-Out Value Distance in whole mm.'s.

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Related Option Switches.

Version

Date

8
ISSUE 3

Extended Use

Details

OPT - 40
Switches by number Switches by name

- 54 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

PIPE SUPPORTS
Description

40 Contd.

Switch Settings

(Contd. from previous page)

SWITCH POSITION 5 - Selective Support Dimensioning. Blank 1 2 3 4 Dimension All supports. Dimension Fabrication type Supports ONLY. Dimension Erection type Supports ONLY. Dimension Offshore type Supports ONLY. Dimension Erection & Offshore type Supports ONLY.

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Related Option Switches.

Version

Date

8
ISSUE 3

Extended Use

7.14

MAR 98

Details

OPT - 40
Switches by number Switches by name

- 55 -

ALIAS

41. Bore/Dimension/Weight Control

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

BORE / DIMENSION / WEIGHT CONTROL


Description

41

Various combinations of Bore, Dimensional Units and Dimension Styles (including Stacked Fractions) are available, as defined below. There is also a control to determine how the numeric part of a metric coordinate is formatted. Finally, this switch is also used for component weight output control. Weight per unit length can be specified in different units to those used on the isometric. Notes. The pipeline input file must be in the units specified in this Option Switch. 1) Units for Bore and Weight data included in the input pipeline data file are set in Option Switch 65. 2) Bolt Length and Bolt Diameter units set in this Option Switch may be changed by using Option Switch 65.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in eight parts. SWITCH POSITION 1 - Dimensional units type. 0 1 2 Default for Inch Pipeline bores and mm. linear dimensions. (Known as Mixed or SI units). For Inch Pipeline bores and Feet & Inch linear dimensions. (Known as Imperial units). For mm. Pipeline bores and mm. Linear dimensions. (Known as Metric units). (Continued overpage) 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Switch Layout

Switch Position

All Settings
Related Program Development Specs. Version Date

DEV. NO. 61 - WEIGHT FACILITY. First DEV. NO. 64 - EXTERNAL WEIGHT / C of G. Introduced DEV.NO. 83F - DIMENSIONING ENHANCEMENTS
Related Option Switches. Extended Use

1.0 7.0 7.2 7.4 8.5.4

APR 83 OCT 93 APR 95 DEC 95 DEC 00

Details Switches by number Switches by name

O.S. 65

7.17.7 MAY 99

ISSUE 2

OPT - 41

- 56 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

BORE / DIMENSION / WEIGHT CONTROL


Switch Settings

41 Cont.

(Continued from previous page)

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Co-ordinate Output format (for Metric co-ordinates only). 0 1 2 3 For Metric dimensions/co-ordinates output in mm. For Metric co-ordinates output in M.mm format. For Metric dimensions output in M.mm format For Metric dimensions/co-ordinates in M.mm format.

SWITCH POSITION 3 - Feet-Inch output & Stacked Fractions . 0 1 2 For standard output of FT INS dimensions - of the form 6 10. 3/8 Same as value 0 but with an added dash - of the form 6 - 10.3/8 Same as value 1 but with a blank space instead of a dot (.) between inches and fractions of an inch of the form 6 - 10 3/8 Stacked Fractions with a dash - of the form 6 - 103/8" 3 Stacked Fractions without a dash - of the form 6 10 /8" Output decimal inches to 1 decimal place. Output decimal inches to 2 decimal places. Output decimal inches to 3 decimal places. Output decimal inches to 4 decimal places.

3 4 5 6 7 8

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Related Option Switches. Extended Use

Version

Date

8.11.0 APR 03

ISSUE 2

OPT - 41

Switches by number Switches by name

- 57 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

BORE / DIMENSION / WEIGHT CONTROL


Switch Settings

41 Cont.

(Continued from previous page)

SWITCH POSITION 4 - Weight Information Output / Weight Units. 0 Default for NO Weight information to be output. (This applies to ALL outputs I.e. Material Lists, Weight output on Drawing Frame, Material Control Files, etc.). All Weights - Input / Output to be in Kilograms (KGS). All Weights - Input / Output to be in Pounds (LBS). All Weights - Input / Output to be in Kilograms / Metre (KGS/M). All Weights - Input / Output to be in Pounds / Metre (LBS/M). All Weights - Input / Output to be in Kilograms / Foot (KGS/FT). All Weights - Input / Output to be in Pounds / Foot (LBS/FT).

1 2 3 4 5 6

SWITCH POSITION 5 - Component Weight Output 0 or Blank 1 2 Default for NO Component Weight output on Material List. Any Component Weight output will be a Total Weight (I.e. Quantity x Unit Weight). Any Component Weight output will be the individual Weight of each component type (i.e. No multiplication x Quantity).

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Related Option Switches. Extended Use

Version

Date

ISSUE 2

OPT - 41

Switches by number Switches by name

- 58 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

BORE / DIMENSION / WEIGHT CONTROL


Switch Settings

41 Cont.

(Continued from previous page)

SWITCH POSITIONS 6 & 7 - Imperial Dimension Output Format (Inches or Feet-Inches) 0 1 Value For program to change dimensioning from INCHES to FEET-INCHES at 24. For dimensions to be output in INCHES. The value is set to a number of whole inches at which output style changes from INCHES to FEET-INCHES. Valid input is 12 or greater.

SWITCH POSITION 8 - Suppression of Bore (N.S.) output at Branch (Tee / Olet / Cross) and Reducer locations 0 1 N.S. information output at Branches & Reducers as normal. N.S. information output at Branches & Reducers to be suppressed.

SWITCH POSITION 9 - Nominal size output separately on pipe section for set-on-tee and crosses Blank 1 N.S. output at set-on-tee and crosses combined N.S. output at set-on-tee and crosses shown separately

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Related Option Switches. Extended Use

Version

Date

ISSUE 2

OPT - 41

Switches by number Switches by name

- 59 -

ALIAS

42. Drawing viewpoint

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DRAWING VIEWPOINT
Description

42

This Option Switch controls the Viewing Direction (isometric orientation). There are four orientation options which may be chosen by the User and the selected one is indicated on the isometric by the direction the North Arrow is pointing. A secondary use of the Option Switch permits the User to request the North arrow to be highlighted by an enclosing box.
Switch Settings

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Default for North Arrow to point Top Left. For North Arrow to point Bottom Right. For North Arrow to point Top Right. For North Arrow to point Top Left. For North Arrow to point Bottom Left. For North Arrow to point Bottom Right with enclosing box. For North Arrow to point Top Right with enclosing box. For North Arrow to point Top Left with enclosing box. For North Arrow to point Bottom Left with enclosing box.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

All Settings
Related Program Development Specs. NONE First Introduced Extended Use Version Date

1.0

APR 83

Details

OPT - 42
Switches by number Switches by name

- 60 -

ALIAS

43. Pipe wastage factor - Area 1

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

PIPE WASTAGE FACTOR - AREA 1


Description

43

Controls any additional Pipe quantity that needs to be added to the Material List to allow for Wastage during fabrication. The Option Switch is one of nine that holds a percentage factor that is used to calculate pipe Wastage allowances. Each of the nine Option Switches is applicable to a particular Plant Area which can be identified in the Pipeline Input Data File.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is for Pipe Wastage in Plant Area 1.

For a percentage multiplication factor of zero. (This setting allows the User to obtain NO increase in Pipe material quantity even though a value may have been included in the Pipeline Data Input File). Default for a percentage multiplication factor of 1. (This value does Not increase the Basic Wastage percentage that may be set in applicable records in the Pipeline Input Data File). Where Value is an additional factor that is multiplied by the Basic Wastage Factor (input on appropriate records in the Pipeline Data Input File) to arrive at a final Wastage Factor percentage. (e.g. A value of 2 in this Option Switch would give a final percentage of twice the value of any figure included in the Pipeline Data Input File).

Value

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Zero or Value
Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches. O.S. 45 44 44 to O.S. 51 inclusive. 46 47 48 First Introduced Version Date

1.0

APR 83

49

50

51

Extended Use

Details

OPT - 43
Switches by number Switches by name

- 61 -

ALIAS

44. Pipe wastage factor - Area 2

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

PIPE WASTAGE FACTOR - AREA 2


Description

44

Controls any additional Pipe quantity that needs to be added to the Material List to allow for Wastage during fabrication. The Option Switch is one of nine that holds a percentage factor that is used to calculate pipe Wastage allowances. Each of the nine Option Switches is applicable to a particular Plant Area which can be identified in the Pipeline Input Data File.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is for Pipe Wastage in Plant Area 2.

For a percentage multiplication factor of zero. (This setting allows the User to obtain NO increase in Pipe material quantity even though a value may have been included in the Pipeline Data Input File). Default for a percentage multiplication factor of 1. (This value does Not increase the Basic Wastage percentage that may be set in applicable records in the Pipeline Input Data File). Where Value is an additional factor that is multiplied by the Basic Wastage Factor (input on appropriate records in the Pipeline Data Input File) to arrive at a final Wastage Factor percentage. (e.g. A value of 2 in this Option Switch would give a final percentage of twice the value of any figure included in the Pipeline Data Input File).

Value

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Zero or Value
Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches. O.S. 45 51 43 43 and O.S. 45 47O.S.48 inclusive. 50 46 to 49 First Introduced Version Date

1.0

APR 83

51

Extended Use

Details

OPT - 44

Switches by number Switches by name

- 62 -

ALIAS

45. Pipe wastage factor - Area 3

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

PIPE WASTAGE FACTOR - AREA 3


Description

45

Controls any additional Pipe quantity that needs to be added to the Material List to allow for Wastage during fabrication. The Option Switch is one of nine that holds a percentage factor that is used to calculate pipe Wastage allowances. Each of the nine Option Switches is applicable to a particular Plant Area which can be identified in the Pipeline Input Data File.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is for Pipe Wastage in Plant Area 3.

For a percentage multiplication factor of zero. (This setting allows the User to obtain NO increase in Pipe material quantity even though a value may have been included in the Pipeline Data Input File). Default for a percentage multiplication factor of 1. (This value does Not increase the Baisic Wastage percentage that may be set in applicable records in the Pipeline Input Data File). Where Value is an additional factor that is multiplied by the Basic Wastage Factor (input on appropriate records in the Pipeline Data Input File) to arrive at a final Wastage Factor percentage. (e.g. A value of 2 in this Option Switch would give a final percentage of twice the value of any figure included in the Pipeline Data Input File).

Value

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Zero or Value
Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches. First Introduced Version Date

1.0

APR 83

Extended O.S. 43 and O.S. 44 47 O.S. 46 to O.S. 51 inclusive. Use and 48 43 44 46 49 50 51

Details

OPT - 45
Switches by number Switches by name

- 63 -

ALIAS

46. Pipe wastage factor - Area 4

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

PIPE WASTAGE FACTOR - AREA 4


Description

46

Controls any additional Pipe quantity that needs to be added to the Material List to allow for Wastage during fabrication. The Option Switch is one of nine that holds a percentage factor that is used to calculate pipe Wastage allowances. Each of the nine Option Switches is applicable to a particular Plant Area which can be identified in the Pipeline Input Data File.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is for Pipe Wastage in Plant Area 4.

For a percentage multiplication factor of zero. (This setting allows the User to obtain NO increase in Pipe material quantity even though a value may have been included in the Pipeline Data Input File). Default for a percentage multiplication factor of 1. (This value does Not increase the Basic Wastage percentage that may be set in applicable records in the Pipeline Input Data File). Where Value is an additional factor that is multiplied by the Basic Wastage Factor (input on appropriate records in the Pipeline Data Input File) to arrive at a final Wastage Factor percentage. (e.g. A value of 2 in this Option Switch would give a final percentage of twice the value of any figure included in the Pipeline Data Input File).

Value

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Zero or Value
Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches. O.S. 44 43 43 to O.S. 45 and O.S.48 to O.S. 5150 51 45 47 47 49 inclusive. First Introduced Extended Use Version Date

1.0

APR 83

Details

OPT - 46
Switches by number Switches by name

- 64 -

ALIAS

47. Pipe wastage factor - Area 5

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

PIPE WASTAGE FACTOR - AREA 5


Description

47

Controls any additional Pipe quantity that needs to be added to the Material List to allow for Wastage during fabrication. The Option Switch is one of nine that holds a percentage factor that is used to calculate pipe Wastage allowances. Each of the nine Option Switches is applicable to a particular Plant Area which can be identified in the Pipeline Input Data File.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is for Pipe Wastage in Plant Area 5.

For a percentage multiplication factor of zero. (This setting allows the User to obtain NO increase in Pipe material quantity even though a value may have been included in the Pipeline Data Input File). Default for a percentage multiplication factor of 1. (This value does Not increase the Basic Wastage percentage that may be set in applicable records in the Pipeline Input Data File). Where Value is an additional factor that is multiplied by the Basic Wastage Factor (input on appropriate records in the Pipeline Data Input File) to arrive at a final Wastage Factor percentage. (e.g. A value of 2 in this Option Switch would give a final percentage of twice the value of any figure included in the Pipeline Data Input File).

Value

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Zero or Value
Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches. O.S. 44 43 43 to O.S. 46 and O.S.48 to O.S. 5150 51 45 46 48 49 inclusive. First Introduced Extended Use Version Date

1.0

APR 83

Details

OPT - 47
Switches by number Switches by name

- 65 -

ALIAS

48. Pipe wastage factor - Area 6

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

PIPE WASTAGE FACTOR - AREA 6


Description

48

Controls any additional Pipe quantity that needs to be added to the Material List to allow for Wastage during fabrication. The Option Switch is one of nine that holds a percentage factor that is used to calculate pipe Wastage allowances. Each of the nine Option Switches is applicable to a particular Plant Area which can be identified in the Pipeline Input Data File.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is for Pipe Wastage in Plant Area 6.

For a percentage multiplication factor of zero. (This setting allows the User to obtain NO increase in Pipe material quantity even though a value may have been included in the Pipeline Data Input File). Default for a percentage multiplication factor of 1. (This value does Not increase the Basic Wastage percentage that may be set in applicable records in the Pipeline Input Data File). Where Value is an additional factor that is multiplied by the Basic Wastage Factor (input on appropriate records in the Pipeline Data Input File) to arrive at a final Wastage Factor percentage. (e.g. A value of 2 in this Option Switch would give a final percentage of twice the value of any figure included in the Pipeline Data Input File).

Value

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Zero or Value
Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches. O.S. 44 43 43 to O.S. 47 and O.S.47 to O.S. 5150 51 45 46 49 49 inclusive. First Introduced Extended Use Version Date

1.0

APR 83

Details

OPT - 48
Switches by number Switches by name

- 65 -

ALIAS

49. Pipe wastage factor - Area 7

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

PIPE WASTAGE FACTOR - AREA 7


Description

49

Controls any additional Pipe quantity that needs to be added to the Material List to allow for Wastage during fabrication. The Option Switch is one of nine that holds a percentage factor that is used to calculate pipe Wastage allowances. Each of the nine Option Switches is applicable to a particular Plant Area which can be identified in the Pipeline Input Data File.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is for Pipe Wastage in Plant Area 7.

For a percentage multiplication factor of zero. (This setting allows the User to obtain NO increase in Pipe material quantity even though a value may have been included in the Pipeline Data Input File). Default for a percentage multiplication factor of 1. (This value does Not increase the Basic Wastage percentage that may be set in applicable records in the Pipeline Input Data File). Where Value is an additional factor that is multiplied by the Basic Wastage Factor (input on appropriate records in the Pipeline Data Input File) to arrive at a final Wastage Factor percentage. (e.g. A value of 2 in this Option Switch would give a final percentage of twice the value of any figure included in the Pipeline Data Input File).

Value

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Zero or Value
Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches. First Introduced Version Date

1.0

APR 83

Extended O.S. 43 to O.S. 48 and O.S.47 and O.S. 51 inclusive. Use 50 43 44 45 46 48 50 51

Details Switches by number Switches by name

OPT - 49

- 66 -

ALIAS

50. Pipe wastage factor - Area 8

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

PIPE WASTAGE FACTOR - AREA 8


Description

50

Controls any additional Pipe quantity that needs to be added to the Material List to allow for Wastage during fabrication. The Option Switch is one of nine that holds a percentage factor that is used to calculate pipe Wastage allowances. Each of the nine Option Switches is applicable to a particular Plant Area which can be identified in the Pipeline Input Data File.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is for Pipe Wastage in Plant Area 8.

For a percentage multiplication factor of zero. (This setting allows the User to obtain NO increase in Pipe material quantity even though a value may have been included in the Pipeline Data Input File). Default for a percentage multiplication factor of 1. (This value does Not increase the Basic Wastage percentage that may be set in applicable records in the Pipeline Input Data File). Where Value is an additional factor that is multiplied by the Basic Wastage Factor (input on appropriate records in the Pipeline Data Input File) to arrive at a final Wastage Factor percentage. (e.g. A value of 2 in this Option Switch would give a final percentage of twice the value of any figure included in the Pipeline Data Input File).

Value

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Zero or Value
Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches. O.S. 44 43 43 to O.S. 49 and O.S.47 inclusive. 49 45 46 51 48 First Introduced Version Date

1.0

APR 83

51

Extended Use

Details Switches by number Switches by name

OPT - 50

- 67 -

ALIAS

51. Pipe wastage factor - Area 9

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

PIPE WASTAGE FACTOR - AREA 9


Description

51

Controls any additional Pipe quantity that needs to be added to the Material List to allow for Wastage during fabrication. The Option Switch is one of nine that holds a percentage factor that is used to calculate pipe Wastage allowances. Each of the nine Option Switches is applicable to a particular Plant Area which can be identified in the Pipeline Input Data File.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is for Pipe Wastage in Plant Area 9.

For a percentage multiplication factor of zero. (This setting allows the User to obtain NO increase in Pipe material quantity even though a value may have been included i n the Pipeline Data Input File). Default for a percentage multiplication factor of 1. (This value does Not increase the Basic Wastage percentage that may be set in applicable records in the Pipeline Input Data File). Where Value is an additional factor that is multiplied by the Basic Wastage Factor (input on appropriate records in the Pipeline Data Input File) to arrive at a final Wastage Factor percentage. (e.g. A value of 2 in this Option Switch would give a final percentage of twice the value of any figure included in the Pipeline Data Input File).

Value

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Zero or Value
Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches. O.S. 44 43 43 to O.S. 50 inclusive.47 45 46 First Introduced Version Date

1.0

APR 83

48

49

50

Extended Use

Details

OPT - 51

Switches by number Switches by name

- 68 -

ALIAS

52. Equipment trim drawings

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

EQUIPMENT TRIM DRAWINGS


Description

52

This Option Switch controls the various functions (listed below) related to the generation of Equipment Trim (Vessel Trim) drawings and associated Material Control files.

Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in three parts.

SWITCH POSITION 1 - Part Number sequencing on the Material List. 0 Part Numbers starting at 1 for each Nozzle. 1 Parts sequentially numbered (starting at 1) for the whole Material List. SWITCH POSITION 2 - Material Control File content for Equipment Trim entries. 0 or blank All components related to a single Equipment Item accumulated and written to the Material Control file under a single 'Pipeline' entry. Equipment Trim Reference is used as the 'Pipeline Reference' for identification purposes. 1 Components for each Nozzle kept separate and written to the Material Control file using the individual Pipeline Reference associated with each Nozzle. (Continued overpage)

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Blank or Zero, blank one or one


Related Program Development Specs.

Either Setting
Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

DEV. NO. 34 - EQUIPMENT TRIM FACILITY.

5.8

MAY 89

Details

OPT - 52

Switches by number Switches by name

- 69 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

EQUIPMENT TRIM DRAWINGS


Description

52 Cont.

Switch Settings

(Continued from previous page)

SWITCH POSITION 3 - Style of Input Data File. 0 1 Single Pipeline type file (where there is only one set of Header Records). Multiple Pipeline type file (where there are Multiple sets of Header Records).

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

Details

OPT - 52
Switches by number Switches by name

- 70 -

ALIAS

53. Weld numbering

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

WELD NUMBERING
Description

53

Controls aspects related to the Weld Numbering function, thus:i) Text Size. ii) Type of Welds that are to be numbered on the isometric. iii) Whether or not to plot a Weld Box / Operations Box. iv) Weld numbering sequence where multi-drawings for a pipeline are produced. v) Individual Weld numbering by category. vi) Support Weld numbering sequence. This Option Switch is in seven parts. SWITCH POSITION 1 - Weld Number text size & Weld type to be numbered. 0 Default for No Weld Numbers. 1 For Small size Weld Numbers 1.5mm high. 2 For Medium size Weld Numbers 1.8mm high. 3 For Large size Weld Numbers 2.1mm high. 4 To number only Fabrication type welds - Small size. 5 - Medium size. 6 - Large size. 7 To number only Erection type welds - Small size. 8 - Medium size. 9 - Large size. Notes. 1) All the above size values are only valid when Weld Numbers are being plotted in the original circular style enclosures. 2) This Option Switch Position should be set to value 0, 1, 2 or 3 if Position 4 is set to value 0 or 1. (Continued over page)
Switch Settings

Switch Position

Switch Layout

All Settings
Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 57 - WELDING UPGRADE. DEV. NO. 58 - ISO REPEATABILITY STAGE II. DEV. NO. 74D - SUPPORT WELD PREFIX AND NUMBERING SEQUENCES Related Option Switches.

1.0 7.0

APR 83 OCT 93

54
ISSUE 2

75

77

7.4 DEC 95 7.16.0 MAY 99 8.11.0 APR 03

Details Switches by number Switches by name

OPT - 53

- 71 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

WELD NUMBERING
Description

53 Cont.

Switch Settings

(Continued from previous page)

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Weld Box / Operations Box generation. 0 Default for No Weld / Operations Box. 1 For Weld Box Summary to be plotted. 2 For Operations Box Summary to be plotted / printed. SWITCH POSITION 3 - Weld Number Sequence Control. 0 1 2 Default for Weld Number current sequence to continue on each new drawing. For Weld Numbers to commence at 1 on each new drawing. Spool isometric Weld Numbers to match Full isometric Weld Numbers when using continuous Weld Numbers across drawings. Spool isometric Weld Numbers to match Full isometric Weld Numbers when using the Weld Number commencing at 1 on each new drawing facility. Default to have Offshore Weld Numbers generated. To Number Offshore Welds only. Offshore Welds NOT to be Numbered. This Option Switch Position should be set to value 2 when Position 1 is set to value 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9.

SWITCH POSITION 4 - Offshore Weld Number control. 0 1 2 Note

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Related Option Switches. Extended Use

Version

Date

Details

ISSUE 2

OPT - 53
Switches by number Switches by name

- 72 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

WELD NUMBERING
Description

53 Cont.

Switch Settings

(Continued from previous page)

SWITCH POSITION 5 - Individual Weld Numbering sequences. 0 or Blank 1 Single sequence for all Welds. Individual sequence for each Weld category.

SWITCH POSITION 6 - Support Weld sequences. 0 1 2 Use same sequence as that used for standard Welds. Single sequence for all Support Welds. Individual sequence for each Support Weld category.

SWITCH POSITION 7 - Support Weld Numbering sequences. 0 1 Support Weld sequence to continue on each new drawing. Support Weld Numbers to commence at 1 on each new drawing.

SWITCH POSITION 8 - Alphabetic Weld Identifiers generated 0 1 Numeric Weld Identifiers Alphabetic Weld Identifiers

SWITCH POSITION 9 - Number of characters in the Weld Identifier 0 Value No leading characters output before weld identifier Number of characters output before weld identifier

( Please note Position 8 & 9 cannot be used in conjunction with fixed size weld enclosures, if requested they will automatically be changed to variable size circular enclosure type.)
Related Option Switches. Extended Use

Details

ISSUE 2

OPT - 53
Switches by number Switches by name

- 73 -

ALIAS

54. Weld plotting

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

WELD PLOTTING
Description

54

Controls which types of Welds are plotted on the isometric. The various switch settings permit different types of Welds either to be plotted or not, to suit the particular type of isometric being generated. A further specialised option causes all program generated Site Welds to be changed into Fabrication Welds.
Switch Settings

SWITCH POSITION 1 - Weld types and plotting options 0 1 2 3 4 Default to have all types of welds plotted. To have all welds suppressed. To have only Site welds plotted. To have only Fabrication welds plotted. To change Site welds generated by the program into Fabrication welds. (This action does Not change user inserted Site Welds).

Notes. i) Whenever this Option Switch is set to 1, 2 or 3, Option Switch 53 which controls Weld Numbering should be set to the same requirements. Whenever this option Switch is set to 4 to change Site welds into Fabrication welds, the program will also change the type of Weld numbers generated. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Switch Position

ii)

Switch Layout

0
All Settings
Related Program Development Specs. DEV NO. 89H - MESSAGE ENCLOSURES ELLIPTICAL AND DOUBLE CIRCLES Related Option Switches. O.S. 53 O.S. 75 O.S. 77 O.S. 78

Version First Introduced Extended Use

Date

1.0

APR 83

8.10.0 MAY 02

Details

ISSUE 2

OPT - 54
Switches by number Switches by name

- 74 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

WELD PLOTTING
Switch Settings

54 cont.

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Weld Numbering - Circular or Elliptical Enclosures for Fabrication Welds. 0 1 to 8 9 Weld Number circular or elliptical enclosures fixed to 2 characters. Weld Number circular or elliptical enclosures fixed to value set. Weld Number circular or elliptical enclosures variable sizes.

SWITCH POSITION 3 - Weld Numbering Circular or Elliptical Enclosures for Erection Welds. 0 / 1 to 8 / 9 As Switch Position 2 - see above.

SWITCH POSITION 4 - Weld Numbering Circular or Elliptical Enclosures for Offshore Welds. 0 / 1 to 8 / 9 As Switch Position 2 - see above.

SWITCH POSITION 5 - Support Weld Numbering - Circular or Elliptical Enclosures for Fabrication Welds. 0 to 2 1 to 8 9 Support Weld Number circular or elliptical enclosures fixed characters. Support Weld Number circular or elliptical enclosures fixed to value set. Support Weld Number circular or elliptical enclosures variable sizes.

SWITCH POSITION 6 - Support Weld Numbering Circular or Elliptical Enclosures for Erection Welds. 0 / 1 to 8 / 9 As Switch Position 5 - see above.

SWITCH POSITION 7 - Support Weld Numbering Circular or Elliptical Enclosures for Offshore Welds. 0 / 1 to 8 / 9 As Switch Position 5 - see above.

ISSUE 2

OPT - 54
Switches by number Switches by name

- 75 -

ALIAS

55. Program messages - Run information

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

PROGRAM MESSAGES - RUN INFORMATION


Description

55

This Option Switch controls the volume of data that is written to the Message File (and to the screen during interactive processing) regarding 'Program Running and Plotfile Generation' information.

Switch Settings

SWITCH POSITION 1 - Running Information. Default for minimum Running information. ISOGEN Program 0 version identification and Plot file generation messages are output. 1 As for 0 above with the addition of ISODAT and ISOPLOT module running messages. 2 As for 1 above with the addition of information related to the progress of the isometric through the ISOPLOT module. SWITCH POSITION 2 - Disconnection Message. 0 1 Output Disconnection message local to pipeline break where increased tolerance used to connect pipeline. Suppression of local Disconnection message where increased tolerance used to connect pipeline.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Zero or One
Related Program Development Specs. NONE Related Option Switches. O.S. 21

All Settings
Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

1.0 7.16.0

APR 83 MAY 99

Running messages.

OPT - 55
Switches by number Switches by name

- 76 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

PROGRAM MESSAGES - RUN INFORMATION


Description

55 cont.

Switch Settings

SWITCH POSITION 3 - Disconnected Pipeline. 0 Set pipeline to disconnected when increased tolerance used to connect pipeline. Output of Disconnected Pipeline message at top of drawing. Suppresses Disconnected Pipeline message at top of drawing if pipeline has connected using the increased tolerance (message will always be output if pipeline does not connect using increased tolerance).

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Related Option Switches. Extended Use

Version

Date

OPT - 55
Switches by number Switches by name

- 77 -

ALIAS

56. Program messages - Isodat

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

PROGRAM MESSAGES - ISODAT


Description

56

This Option Switch controls the output of program diagnostic information to the Message File by the ISODAT program during processing. Note. This Option Switch Is A Special Purpose One. It Should Not Be Set By Users, Only By Alias System Support Personnel.
Switch Settings

Default for No diagnostic messages from ISODAT.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Zero or Value
Related Program Development Specs. NONE First Introduced Extended Use Version Date

1.0

APR 83

OPT - 56
Switches by number Switches by name

- 78 -

ALIAS

57. Program messages - Isoplot

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

PROGRAM MESSAGES - ISOPLOT


Description

57

This Option Switch controls the output of program diagnostic information to the Message File by the ISOPLOT program during processing. Note. This Option Switch Is A Special Purpose One. It Should Not Be Set By Users, Only By Alias System Support Personnel.
Switch Settings

Default for No diagnostic messages from ISOPLOT.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Zero or Value
Related Program Development Specs. NONE First Introduced Extended Use Version Date

1.0

APR 83

Details

OPT - 57

Switches by number Switches by name

- 79 -

ALIAS

58. Clear screen

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

CLEAR SCREEN
Description

58

This Option Switch is used to control the clearing of the graphics screen when isometrics are sent to the screen rather than to a plot file.

Switch Settings

0 1

Default for No automatic Screen Clear. Provides automatic clearing of the screen before showing the first isometric.

Note. With the introduction of modern Screen Drivers it is possible that a Clear Screen operation will be performed automatically. The setting of this Option Switch will have no effect in these cases,

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Either Value
Related Program Development Specs. NONE First Introduced Extended Use Version Date

1.0

APR 83

Details

OPT - 58

Switches by number Switches by name

- 80 -

ALIAS

59. Instrument identification

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

INSTRUMENT IDENTIFICATION
Description

59

Controls which particular 3D Design System parameter is used by ISOGEN for Instrument identification on the Material List or any Material Control file that is generated. Typically, 3D Design Systems have parameters for both the Instrument Name (Tag) and the Specification Reference (Item Code), but only one of these may be selected for output.
Switch Settings

0 1

Default for the Instrument Name (Tag) to be output. For the Instrument's Specification Reference (Item Code) to be output.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Either Value
Related Program Development Specs. NONE First Introduced Extended Use Version Date

1.0

APR 83

Details

OPT - 59

Switches by number Switches by name

- 81 -

ALIAS

60. Component tagging

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

COMPONENT TAGGING
Description

60

This Option Switch controls the plotting of Tags / Names on most pipeline components. 'Tagging' of Pipe (Tube) and pipeline elements made from Pipe (Tube) is not supported. 'Tagging' of Instruments is controlled by Option Switch 123. Tags / Names may be switched On or Off to suit the users requirement. A secondary option when plotting Tags / Names is to have the text boxed in with a surrounding enclosure.

Switch Settings

0 1 2

Default for Tags / Names Not to be plotted. To have Tags / Names plotted and boxed in. To have Tags / Names plotted but Not boxed in.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

All Settings
Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 32 - EXTENSION OF COMPONENT NAMING FACILITY. Related Option Switches. O.S. 123 123 Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

1.0 5.5

APR 83 FEB 88

Details Switches by number Switches by name

OPT - 60

- 82 -

ALIAS

61. Insulation indication

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

INSULATION INDICATION
Description

61

This Option Switch controls Insulation indication on the isometric in the form of dashed lines plotted on each side of the pipe and optionally, around components. The feature may switched On or Off to suit the Users requirement.

Switch Settings

0 1 2

Default to have dashed Insulation lines plotted alongside pipeonly, with a gap of 1 mm. To Suppress Insulation indication. To have dashed Insulation lines plotted alongside pipe and all components, both with a 1 mm gap.

Note. When Tracing is also shown, Insulation is only drawn on one side of the pipe.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

All Settings
Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 13 - INSULATION INDICATION ON FITTINGS. Related Option Switches. O.S. 62 62 Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

1.0 4.0

APR 83 JUN 86

Details

OPT - 61
Switches by number Switches by name

- 83 -

ALIAS

62. Tracing indication

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

TRACING INDICATION
Description

62

This Option Switch controls the plotting of Tracing indication on the isometric in the form of a chain dotted line on one side of the pipe and optionally, alongside components. This may switched On or Off to suit the Users requirement.

Switch Settings

0 1 2

Default to have chain dotted Tracing lines plotted alongside pipe only, with a gap of 1 mm. To Suppress Tracing indication. To have chain dotted Tracing lines plotted alongside pipe andall components, both with a 1 mm gap.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

All Settings
Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 12 - TRACING INDICATION ON FITTINGS. Related Option Switches. O.S. 61 61 Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

1.0 4.0

APR 83 JUN 86

Details

OPT - 62

Switches by number Switches by name

- 84 -

ALIAS

63. Printed output - Page length

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

PRINTED OUTPUT PAGE LENGTH


Description

63

This Option Switch controls the number of lines per page on any Printed Output (Reports) generated by the ISOGEN system.

Switch Settings

0 Value

Default for 55 lines per page. Where Value is the required number of lines to be output per page.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Zero or Value
Related Program Development Specs. NONE First Introduced Extended Use Version Date

1.0

APR 83

Details

OPT - 63

Switches by number Switches by name

- 85 -

ALIAS

64. Pipe support identification

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

PIPE SUPPORT IDENTIFICATION


Description

64

This Option Switch controls the identification information that is output for Pipe Supports on the isometric and parts list. For identification purposes, either the Support Name (Tag) or Specification Reference (Item Code) may be used, in the combinations listed below. A further option allows certain support information to be passed to the COMDACE Material Control system. COMDACE is a registered trademark of John Brown Systems Ltd.

Switch Settings

0 1 2 3 4 10

Default for No Support Names (Tags) to be output on the isometric and with the Specification Reference (Item Code) output in the Item Code field of the Material List. For Support Names (Tags) output on the isometric un-boxed and Support Names in the Item Code field of the Material List. For boxed Support Names (Tags) output on the isometric and Specification Reference in the Item Code field of the Material List. As for Value 1 except Supports to be excluded from the Material List As for Value 2 except Supports to be excluded from the Material List Causes Support Names (Tags) to be passed to the COMDACE Material Control system. (PASCE System Users only).

Switch Layout

Switch Position

All Settings
Related Program Development Specs. First DEV. NO. 50(A) - ISOGEN TO 'COMPIPE' LINK. Introduced Extended Use Version Date

1.0 6.0 7.7

APR 83 MAR 91 AUG 96

Details Switches by number Switches by name

ISSUE 2

OPT - 64

- 86 -

ALIAS

65. Bolting units

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

BOLTING UNITS
Description

65

Determines how Bolts are to be reported in terms of Diameter and Length on the Material List and in the Material Control file, and also whether or not they are to be included in the Material Control (MATC) file. Actual data for Bolt Diameters and Length included in any Pipeline Data File must be in the Units specified in this Option Switch.

Switch Settings

This option Switch is in two parts.

SWITCH POSITION 1 - Bolt Length Units and Material Control file option. 0 Default - whereby O.S. 41 Units setting is followed. 1 For Inch Lengths. 2 For mm. Lengths. 3 For No Bolts to be included in the MATC file. (Normally, Bolts will be included). SWITCH POSITION 2 - Bolt Diameter Units. Blank 1 2
Switch Layout

Default - whereby O.S. 41 Units setting is followed. For Inch Diameters. For mm. Diameters. (Continued overpage)
3 2

Switch Position

Blank or Value

Blank or Value

Zero or Value
Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 56 - USER DEFINED MATERIAL LIST. Related Option Switches. O.S. 41

1.0 7.0

APR 83 OCT 93

Details Switches by number Switches by name

8.11.0 APR 03

OPT - 65

- 87 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

BOLTING UNITS
Description

65 Cont.

Bolts can now be excluded from the Material Control file. (NOTE - Bolts can be suppressed from outputting to the Material Control File by setting Position 1 = 3. Using the new Position 3 does not allow bolts lengths to be controlled in the Material List)
Switch Settings

(Continued from previous page)

SWITCH POSITION 3 - Allows bolts to excluded from Material Control File 0 1 Output bolts to the Material Control File Suppress the output of bolts to the Material Control File

Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 56 - USER DEFINED MATERIAL LIST. Related Option Switches. O.S. 41

Version First Introduced Extended Use

Date

1.0 7.0

APR 83 OCT 93

8.11.0 APR 03

OPT - 65

Switches by number Switches by name

- 88 -

ALIAS

66. Co-ordinates - Supplementary

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

CO-ORDINATES - SUPPLEMENTARY
Description

66

Controls the numerous output combinations that are available for the plotting of N/S and E/W Co-ordinates and Elevations at Bend and Tee intersection points, and at Isometric Split Points. A further option is the output of Co-ordinates and Elevations along Witness Lines rather than on the usual arrowed-out message lines. Co-ordinates can be output at reference items and at pipe supports.
Switch Settings

This option Switch is in six parts. Co-ordinates and Elevations output as arrowed-out messages or on Witness Lines at Bend and Tee intersection points.

SWITCH POSITION 1 -

0 1

Default for arrowed-out message type. Co-ordinates and Elevations output along Witness Lines. Co-ordinates and Elevations output at Bends and Elbows.

SWITCH POSITION 2 -

0 1 2 3
Switch Layout

Default, only output Elevations when changed. No Elevations or Co-ordinates to be output. Output Elevations and Co-ordinates that have changed. Output a full set of Co-ordinates. (Continued overpage) 6 5 4 3 2 1

Switch Position

All Settings
Related Program Development Specs.
DEV. NO. 59 - DIMENSIONING & CO-ORDINATE UPGRADE. First DEV. NO. 83D - REFERENCE ITEMS CO-ORDINATES, THICKNESS & LAYER.

Version Introduced Extended Use

Date

7.0 8.3.0

OCT 93 JUL 00

DEV. NO. 83E - PIPE SUPPORTS - CO-ORDINATES.

Related Option Switches.

Details Switches by number Switches by name

- 89 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

CO-ORDINATES - SUPPLEMENTARY
Description

66 Cont.

Switch Settings

(Continued from previous page) Co-ordinate & Elevation output at Branch Intersection Points

SWITCH POSITION 3 0 1 2 3

Default, only output Elevations when changed. No Elevations or Co-ordinates to be output. Output Elevations and Co-ordinates that have changed. Output a full set of Co-ordinates.

SWITCH POSITION 4 - Co-ordinate output at Isometric Split Points. 0 1 Default, Co-ordinates not output. Full set of Co-ordinates output on both drawings.

SWITCH POSITION 5 - Co-ordinate output at Reference Items. 0 1


Switch Layout

Co-ordinates not output at reference items. Co-ordinates output at reference items.

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Related Option Switches. Extended Use

Version

Date

Details

OPT - 66

Switches by number Switches by name

- 90 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

CO-ORDINATES - SUPPLEMENTARY
Description

66 Cont.

Switch Settings

(Continued from previous page) Co-ordinate output at Pipe Supports

SWITCH POSITION 6 0 1 2 3 4

Co-ordinates not output at pipe supports. Co-ordinates output at Fabrication pipe supports only. Co-ordinates output at Erection pipe supports only. Co-ordinates output at Offshore pipe supports only. Co-ordinates output at all pipe supports.

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Related Option Switches. Extended Use

Version

Date

Details

OPT - 66

Switches by number Switches by name

- 91 -

ALIAS

67. Sloping pipeline - 3D skew depiction

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SLOPING PIPELINE - 3D SKEW DEPICTION


Description

67

Controls the method to be used for the depiction Sloping (Falling) sections of a Pipeline that are skewed in the horizontal plane. Two alternatives are available :i) Full 3D Skew Depiction. (Box or Triangle style). ii) 2D Skew Depiction (Box or Triangle style) + a Fall Indicator.

Switch Settings

0 1

Default for full 3D Box / Triangle depiction. 2D Skew (Box or Triangle) + Fall Indicator.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Either Setting
Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 11 - 3D SLOPING PIPELINE OUTPUT AS 2D + FALL INDICATOR. Related Option Switches. O.S. 19 O.S. 20 O.S. 99 19 20 99 Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

1.0 5.4

APR 83 APR 87

Details

OPT - 67
Switches by number Switches by name

- 92 -

ALIAS

68. Sloping pipeline - Vertical branches

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SLOPING PIPELINE VERTICAL BRANCHES


Description

68

Controls the drawing depiction method to be used when a vertical Branch connection is to be made to a Sloping (Falling) Pipeline using a special Zero Length Bend component. This special Bend (which has no length) is used to carry the angle between the Vertical Branch and the Sloping Pipeline. Two drawing methods are available. One shows a small 2D skew box section between the branch and the main pipe, while the other does not. Where Olets are used in such cases, a text message indicates the orientation direction if the Branch is not developed.
Switch Settings

Default to show the Short Tee branch leg section of pipe skewed. Olets will have an orientation message instead of a skewed section. Both will be dimensioned separately to the connecting pipe.

1 For No separate skew section, the vertical Branch is connected straight into the main pipe. Olets will Not have an orientation message. Both are included in a single inclusive dimension. In both cases the angle between the vertical Branch and the Sloping (Falling) pipeline will be indicated.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Either Setting
Related Program Development Specs. Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

DEV. NO. 2 - ZERO LENGTH BENDS.

5.4

APR 87

Details

OPT - 68

Switches by number Switches by name

- 93 -

ALIAS

69. Terminal type identification

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

TERMINAL TYPE IDENTIFICATION


Description

69

Used to identify the type of graphics terminal. The switch is a two part one where the basic terminal type is set in switch positions 1, 2 and 3, with switch position 4 being used to denote single or dual screen use. Note. This Option Switch is only relevant when the graphics output is sent to the terminal screen rather than to an output file.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in two parts.

SWITCH POSITIONS 1, 2 & 3 - Terminal Type. 0 The Default varies with the computer type. e.g. a setting of 0 gives a Value of 3 on VAX, 7 on Apollo, 12 on HP Starbase, etc. 3 Tektronix 410X, 420X . 4 Westward 2000 and 2015 monochrome family. 5 Westward C2015 colour terminal. 6 IBM GDDM. 7 Apollo. 8 Tektronix 4111. 9 IBM PC emulating Tektronix 410X, 420X. 10 Westward 3220 / 2320. (Continued overpage)
Switch Layout

Switch Position

Blank or One
Related Program Development Specs. VERSION 6 RELEASE NOTES.

All Settings
Version First Introduced Extended Use 6.0 Date MAR 91

OPT - 69

Switches by number Switches by name

- 94 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

TERMINAL TYPE IDENTIFICATION


Description

69 Contd.

Switch Settings

(Continued from previous page)

11 12 13 14 15 16

VAX VWS. HP Starbase. HP Starbase with X Windows. DEC Windows. Workstation / PC (Packet Driver). Silicon Graphics.

SWITCH POSITION 4 - Dual Screen use. Blank Default for single screen operation. 1 For dual screen operation.

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

OPT - 69
Switches by number Switches by name

- 95 -

ALIAS

70. Skew indication - Branches

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SKEW INDICATION - BRANCHES


Description

70

Optionally permits simple skewed Branch legs to have the normal Skew Box / Triangle enclosure suppressed and replaced by a single pipe length dimension and a text message giving the Branch Orientation. When used to suppress the normal box enclosure, the value set represents the maximum number of fittings permitted in the Branch. Branches found to contain more fittings than this will be drawn with the normal Skew Box / Triangle enclosure.
Switch Settings

0 Value

Default for all Branches to be drawn with normal Skew Box / Triangle depiction. Suppress Skew Box / Triangle depiction on Branch Legs whose number of components is less than or equal to the Value set, and output an Orientation Message.

Note. This facility is only available on straight through Branches. Any change in direction along the Branch will automatically cause the program to default to normal Skew Box / Triangle output.

( Continued overpage )
Switch Layout

Switch Position

Blank or 1

Zero or Value
Date

Version Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO 35 - SUPPRESSION OF SKEW BOXES / TRIANGLES ON BRANCH LEGS. First 5.4.1 Introduced Extended Use

FEB 88

8.11.0 APR 03

OPT - 70

Switches by number Switches by name

- 96 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SKEW INDICATION - BRANCHES


Description

70 Cont.

Skew orientation directions can now be output showing rotation relative to previous position or rotation from primary direction

Switch Settings

( Continued from previous page )

Switch Position 3 - Skew rotation depiction 0 1 Orientation direction message relative to previous position Orientation direction message relative to primary direction

Switch Layout

Version Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO 35 - SUPPRESSION OF SKEW BOXES / TRIANGLES ON BRANCH LEGS. First 5.4.1 Introduced Extended Use

Date

FEB 88

OPT - 70

Switches by number Switches by name

- 97 -

ALIAS

71. Plotfile format

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

PLOTFILE FORMAT
Description

71

This Option Switch controls :i) Plotfile Output Format. The Smart Format of graphics relates to a Plotfile that has (a) vectors associated with a pipeline component grouped together to form a single object in the drawing file (b) has some non graphical attributes associated with the symbol (Tags/Attributes). ii) File format of any nominated Backing Frame and Detail Sketch files. iii) The generation of an I01 type filename extension.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in six parts.

SWITCH POSITIONS 1, 2 & 3 - Plotfile Output Format. 0 3 4 8 11 16 Default for ISOGEN plotfile format (ISO). Postscript (PSC), Backing Frame unavailable. AutoCAD V12 DXF format, Backing Frame optional. MicroStation DGN V7 and below, Backing Frame mandatory. Alias internal Smart format (POD), Backing Frame optional. AutoCAD DXF Smart format, Backing Frame mandatory. The AutoCAD DXF Plotfile version will be the same as that of the DXF Backing Frame. (Continued overpage). 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Switch Position

Switch Layout

All Settings

All Settings

All Settings
Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

Related Program Development Specs. VERSION 6.0 RELEASE NOTES DEV. NO. 62 - DETAIL SKETCHES FACILITY V8.10.0 RELEASE NOTES Related Option Switches. O.S. 92 O.S. 138

6.0 7.0 7.14.4

MAR 91 OCT 94 JUL 98

Details Switches by number Switches by name

ISSUE 3

OPT - 71

- 98 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

PLOTFILE FORMAT
Switch Settings

71 Cont
(Continued from previous page).

17

18 19 20 21

AutoCAD DWG Smart format, Backing Frame mandatory. The AutoCAD DWG Plotfile version will be the same as that of the DWG Backing Frame. MicroStation DGN V7 and below Smart format, Backing Frame mandatory. SmartSketch IGR Smart format, Backing Frame mandatory. SmartPlant SHAPE2D SHA Smart format, Backing Frame mandatory. MicroStation DGN V8 and above Smart format, Backing Frame mandatory.

SWITCH POSITION 4, 5 & 6 - Backing Frame and Detail Sketch file format. Note: Format must match that specified for the Plotfile Output as set in Position 1, 2 & 3 and must be of the same CAD system version as the requested Plotfile Output Format. 4 8 11 16 17 AutoCAD V12 DXF format. MicroStation DGN V7 and below format. Alias internal Smart format (POD) AutoCAD DXF format. The generated plotfile will be the same AutoCAD DXF version as this Backing Frame. AutoCAD DWG format, Backing Frame mandatory. The generated plotfile will be the same AutoCAD DWG version as the Backing Frame. MicroStation DGN V7 and below format. SmartSketch IGR Smart format. SmartPlant SHAPE2D SHA format. Smart MicroStation DGN V8 and above.

18 19 20 21

Related Option Switches. O.S. 92 O.S. 138

Extended Use

8.10.0 MAY 02

Details Switches by number Switches by name

ISSUE 3

OPT - 71

- 99 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

PLOTFILE FORMAT
Switch Settings

71 Cont
(Continued from previous page).

SWITCH POSITION 7 - Generation of I01 type file name extension. 0 1 2 For normal filenames / extensions. To have I01 type filename extensions on all plotfiles generated that do not use a user defined plotfile prefix. To have the plotfile output format extension appended to the I01 type filename extension on all plotfiles generated that do not use a user defined plotfile prefix.

Related Option Switches. O.S. 92 O.S. 138

Extended Use

8.10.0 MAY 02

ISSUE 3

OPT - 71

Switches by number Switches by name

- 100 -

ALIAS

72. Reserved

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

RESERVED
Description

72

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

Details

OPT - 72

Switches by number Switches by name

- 101 -

ALIAS

73. Material part number enclosure style

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

MATERIAL PART NUMBER ENCLOSURE STYLE


Description

73

The Material Part Number enclosure Shapes controlled by O.S. 76 can be further varied by the use of one of three alternative Blank Enclosures Styles controlled by this Option Switch. A Style 1 enclosure is a Blank Box of variable size and shape output below the Standard Material Part number. A Style 2 enclosure is an extended Standard Material Part Number box with a Blank section. A Style 3 enclosure is for the output of Weld Part Numbers for Welds that have been included on the Material List, and like Style 2 will have a Blank section. This is a special function type enclosure that is only available when O.S. 23 - Position 2 is set to a value of 1. This Option Switch controls the Style, Shape and Size of these Blank boxes. All three styles provide a space for the manual addition of supplementary information to the isometric.

Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in four parts.

SWITCH POSITIONS 1 & 2 - Style 1 Enclosure Box size. 0 Default for the standard part number box enclosure with no additional Style 1 Enclosure Box. Value Where Value equals the number of blank characters that dynamically determines the size of the additional Style 1 Enclosure Box. (Continued overpage)

Switch Layout

Switch Position

All Settings
Related Program Development Specs. Version Date

DEV. NO. 56 - USER DEFINED MATERIAL First LIST. Introduced


Related Option Switches. O.S. 76 76 Extended Use

7.0

OCT 94

Details

ISSUE 2

OPT - 73

Switches by number Switches by name

- 98 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

MATERIAL PART NUMBER ENCLOSURE STYLE


Description

73 Contd.

Switch Settings

(Continued from previous page)

SWITCH POSITIONS 3 & 4 - Style 2 Enclosure Box setting. 0 Default for no extended Style 2 Enclosure Box. Value Where Value equals the number of blank characters that dynamically determines the size of the extended Style 2 Enclosure Box. Note. The Style 2 Enclosure Box shape is controlled by the setting of O.S. 76. SWITCH POSITION 5 - Style 1 Enclosure Box shape. 0 Enclosure Box with Square ends. 1 Enclosure Box with Diamond ends. 2 Enclosure Box with Round ends. SWITCH POSITIONS 6 & 7 - Style 3 Enclosure Box setting (For Welds on the Material List). Blank Default for no extended Style 3 Enclosure Box. Value Where Value equals the number of blank characters that dynamically determines the size of the extended Style 3 Enclosure Box.

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Related Option Switches.

Version

Date

76
ISSUE 2

Extended Use

Details

OPT - 73

Switches by number Switches by name

- 99 -

ALIAS

74. Material list accumulation control

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

MATERIAL LIST ACCUMULATION CONTROL


Description

74

There are extensive options that determine how components are included on or excluded from the Material List. Materials may be processed by category - Fabrication, Erection or Offshore, and, furthermore, Gasket, Bolt and Weld Groups may be controlled separately. Non-accumulation means that each occurrence of an item will result in an individual entry being made on the Material List with a quantity of 1 off, or, in the case of Pipe, each individual length will be listed separately. Finally, there is an option to have nominated Material categories suppressed completely.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in six parts. SWITCH POSITION 1 - Fabrication Materials. 0 Default to have Fabrication items accumulated normally. 1 For non-accumulation of Fabrication items (excluding Pipe). 2 For all Fabrication items to be suppressed. 3 For non-accumulation of Fabrication items (including Pipe). SWITCH POSITION 2 - Erection Materials. 0 Default to have Erection items accumulated normally. 1 For non-accumulation of Erection items (excluding Pipe). 2 For all Erection items to be suppressed. (Continued overpage)

Switch Layout

Switch Position

All Settings
Related Program Development Specs. Version Date

DEV. NO. 56 - USER DEFINED MATERIAL First LIST. Introduced


Extended Use

7.0 7.4

OCT 94 DEC 95

Details Switches by number Switches by name

ISSUE 2

OPT - 74

- 100 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

MATERIAL LIST ACCUMULATION CONTROL


Description

74 Contd.

Switch Settings

(Continued from previous page) SWITCH POSITION 3 - Offshore Materials. 0 Default to have Offshore items accumulated normally. 1 For non-accumulation of Offshore items (excl. Pipe). 2 For all Offshore items to be suppressed. SWITCH POSITION 4 - Gaskets. 0 Default to have Gaskets accumulated normally. 1 For non-accumulation of Gaskets. 2 For all Gaskets to be suppressed. SWITCH POSITION 5 - Bolts. 0 Default to have Bolts accumulated normally. 1 For non-accumulation of Bolts. 2 For all Bolts to be suppressed. SWITCH POSITION 6 - Welds. 0 Default to have Welds accumulated normally. 1 For non-accumulation of Welds. 2 For all Welds to be suppressed.

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

Details

OPT - 74

Switches by number Switches by name

- 101 -

ALIAS

75. Weld number - Enclosure and prefix

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

WELD NUMBER - ENCLOSURE WELD NUMBER - PREFIX


Description

75

Weld Numbers can optionally have a Weld Prefix character(s), and a variety of enclosure types. Both the Weld Number enclosure type and the Weld Prefix may be separately controlled for Shop, Site / Field and Offshore welds. Note. When the Weld Number enclosure style is not the original circular type then the Weld Number character size is controlled by O.S. 4 and not O.S. 53.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in nine parts.

SWITCH POSITION 1 - Weld Number Enclosure style for Shop Welds. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Default for Weld Numbers in a fixed sized circle. Diamond ended box. Round ended box. Small triangular shaped enclosure. Small diamond shaped enclosure. Square ended box. Dynamically sized circle. No weld number enclosure. No shop weld numbers to be output on the plotted isometric. Elliptical weld enclosure. (Continued overpage)
Switch Layout

Switch Position

Blank or one

Zero or one

Zero Zero Zero Zero Zero or value or one or value or one or value
Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

Related Program Development Specs.

DEV. NO. 57 - WELDING FACILITIES DEV. NO. 89H - MESSAGE ENCLOSURES


Related Option Switches. O.S. 53 O.S. 54 O.S. 77

7.0 7.6

OCT 94 MAY 96

Details Switches by number Switches by name

8.10.0 MAY 02

ISSUE 2

OPT - 75

- 102 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

WELD NUMBER - ENCLOSURE WELD NUMBER - PREFIX


Switch Settings

75 Contd.
(Continued from previous page)

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Weld Prefix on Shop Welds. 0 1 Default for No Weld Prefix to be added. Weld Prefix added to Weld Number.

SWITCH POSITION 3 - Weld Number Enclosure style for Site / Field Welds. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Default for Weld Numbers in a fixed sized circle. Diamond ended box. Round ended box. Small triangular shaped enclosure. Small diamond shaped enclosure. Square ended box. Dynamically sized circle. No weld number enclosure. No Site/Field weld numbers to be output on the plotted isometric. Elliptical weld enclosure.

SWITCH POSITION 4 - Weld Prefix on Site / Field Welds. 0 1 Default for No Weld Prefix to be added. For Weld Prefix added to Weld Number.

SWITCH POSITION 5 - Weld Number Enclosure style for Offshore Welds. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Default for Weld Numbers in a fixed sized circle. Diamond ended box. Round ended box. Small triangular shaped enclosure. Small diamond shaped enclosure. Square ended box. Dynamically sized circle. No weld number enclosure. No Offshore weld numbers to be output on the plotted isometric. Elliptical weld enclosure.

Details Switches by number Switches by name

ISSUE 2

OPT - 75

- 103 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

WELD NUMBER - ENCLOSURE WELD NUMBER - PREFIX


Switch Settings

75 Contd.
(Continued from previous page)

SWITCH POSITION 6 - Weld Prefix on Offshore Welds. 0 1 Default for No Weld Prefix to be added. For Weld Prefix added to Weld Number.

SWITCH POSITION 7 - Double line Weld Number Enclosure style for Shop Welds. 0 1 Single line circle enclosure. Double line Weld Number Enclosure (use with circular enclosure to get double circles).

SWITCH POSITION 8 - Double line Weld Number Enclosure style for Field / Site Welds.

0 1

Single line circle enclosure. Double line Weld Number Enclosure (use with circular enclosure to get double circles).

SWITCH POSITION 9 - Double line Weld Number Enclosure style for Offshore Welds.

0/Blank 1

Single line circle enclosure. Double line Weld Number Enclosure (use with circular enclosure to get double circles).

ISSUE 2

OPT - 75

Switches by number Switches by name

- 104 -

ALIAS

76. Material part number enclosure shape

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

MATERIAL PART NUMBER ENCLOSURE SHAPE


Description

76

Controls the Shape of the Box Enclosure used to surround the standard type of Material List Part Numbers on the isometric. (For details of an alternative Material List Part Number Box Enclosure Style - see O.S. 73).
Switch Settings

SWITCH POSITION 1 - Material Part Number Enclosures 0 1 2 6 7 8 9 Default for standard enclosure box shape with rectangular ends. Enclosure box shape with Diamond ends. Enclosure box shape with Round ends. Circular enclosure. No enclosure box - only Part Number text plotted. No Part Numbers nor enclosure box plotted. (Note. In this case, any setting in O.S. 73 is ignored). Elliptical enclosure.

Note. When set, values 1,2 and 7 above will also be applied to the shape of the alternative Style 2 Material List Part Number Enclosure Box as controlled by O.S. 73.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

0
Zero or Value
Related Program Development Specs. Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

DEV. NO. 89H - MESSAGE ENCLOSURES ELLIPSES AND DOUBLE CIRCLES


Related Option Switches. O.S. 73

7.3

SEP 95

8.10.0 MAY 02

Details Switches by number Switches by name

ISSUE 2

OPT - 76

- 105 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

MATERIAL PART NUMBER ENCLOSURE SHAPE

76 cont

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Single/Double Line Circular Material Part Number Enclosures 0 1 Single line Part Number enclosure. Double line Part Number enclosure (use with circular enclosure to get double circles).

SWITCH POSITION 3 - Material Part Number Circular or Elliptical Enclosure Size. 0 1 to 8 9 Part Number circular or elliptical enclosures fixed to 2 characters. Part Number circular or elliptical enclosures fixed to value set. Part Number circular or elliptical enclosures variable sizes.

Details

ISSUE 2

OPT - 76

Switches by number Switches by name

- 106 -

ALIAS

77. Weld number allocation at slip-on flanges and reinforcement pads

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

WELD NUMBER ALLOCATION AT SLIPON FLANGES & REINFORCEMENT PADS


Description

77

Controls the quantity of Weld Numbers that are generated by the program at Slip-On Flange and Reinforcement Pad positions. On Reinforcement Pads, also controlled is the optional generation of an Item Code / Material Description on the Material List and the plotting of the Pad shape. Note. Reinforcement Pads may optionally exist on Set-On Tees / Crosses and on Trunnion type Pipe Supports.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in four parts. SWITCH POSITION 1 - Quantity of Weld Numbers generated at Slip-On Flanges. 0 Default for 2 Weld Numbers. 1 For 1 Weld Number. 2 For 2 Weld Numbers.

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Quantity of extra Weld Numbers generated at Reinforcement Pads. 0 or blank Default for 0 extra Weld Numbers. 1 For 1 extra Weld Number. 2 For 2 extra Weld Numbers. Note. These are extra Weld Numbers because they are created in addition to the normal single and double branch connection Weld Numbers that are generated at Set-On Tee and Cross positions. (Continued over page)
Switch Layout

Switch Position

All Blank Zero Value Zero See over Settings or value or one or one
Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 65G - WELD NUMBERS AT REINFORCEMENT PADS. Related Option Switches. O.S. 53 O.S. 54 O.S.75 Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

7.4 7.13.0 8.10.0

DEC 95 FEB 98 MAY 02

Details Switches by number Switches by name

ISSUE 3

OPT - 77

- 107 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

WELD NUMBER ALLOCATION AT SLIPON FLANGES & REINFORCEMENT


Switch Settings

77 Contd.

(Continued from previous page).

SWITCH POSITION 3 - For Reinforcement Pads, controls the automatic generation of an Item Code and Material Description on the Material List and a plotted shape for the Pad on the isometric. 0 1 Default for No generation of Item Code / Material Description and No plotted Pad shape. For the automatic generation of an Item Code / Material Description and a plotted Pad shape.

SWITCH POSITION 4 - For allocation of Weld Numbers on Fabricated Y types. 0 or Blank 1 2 Default for ONE Weld Number. ONE Weld Number. TWO Weld Numbers.

SWITCH POSITION 5 - For allocation of Weld Numbers on Tack Welds. 0 1 Weld Numbers allocated to Tack Welds. Weld Numbers not allocated to Tack Welds.

SWITCH POSITION 6 - Allocated for future use.

SWITCH POSITION 7 - For allocation of Weld Numbers to Victaulic Welded / Forged Ring Type Clamps (CLVR). 0 1 to 9 2 Weld Numbers allocated to Victaulic Clamp. Specified Weld Numbers allocated to Victaulic Clamp.

Details

ISSUE 3

OPT - 77

Switches by number Switches by name

- 108 -

ALIAS

78. Support Weld Number Enclosures

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SUPPORT WELD NUMBER PREFIX AND ENCLOSURES


Description

78

Support Weld Numbers can optionally have a Support Weld Prefix and be output in a variety of different enclosure styles. Both the Support Weld enclosure style and prefix can be separately controlled for Shop, Site and Offshore categories.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in nine parts. Weld Number enclosure style for Fabrication Support Welds

SWITCH POSITION 1 -

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Switch Layout

Fixed size circle. Diamond ended box. Round ended box. Small triangular shape. Small diamond shape. Square ended box. Dynamically sized circle. No enclosure. Weld Number suppressed. Elliptical Weld Number enclosure. Switch Position

Blank or one

Zero or one

Zero Zero Zero Zero or value or one or value or one


Version

Zero or value
Date

Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 57 - WELDING FACILITIES UPGRADE First DEV. NO. 74D - SUPPORT WELD PREFIX AND Introduced NUMBERING SEQUENCES Related Option Switches. O.S. 53 Extended Use

7.16.0 8.10.0

MAY 99 MAY 02

OPT - 78

Switches by number Switches by name

- 109 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SUPPORT WELD NUMBER PREFIX AND ENCLOSURES

78 cont

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Weld Prefix on Fabrication Support Welds 0 1 No Weld Prefix to be added. Support Weld Prefix to be added to Weld Number.

SWITCH POSITION 3 - Weld Number Enclosure Style for Erection Support Welds. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Fixed size circle. Diamond ended box. Round ended box. Small triangular shape. Small diamond shape. Square ended box. Dynamically sized circle. No enclosure. Weld Number suppressed. Elliptical Weld Number enclosure.

SWITCH POSITION 4 - Weld Prefix on Erection Support Welds. 0 1 No Weld Prefix to be added. Support Weld Prefix to be added to Weld Number.

SWITCH POSITION 5 - Weld Number Enclosure Style for Offshore Support Welds. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Fixed size circle. Diamond ended box. Round ended box. Small triangular shape. Small diamond shape. Square ended box. Dynamically sized circle. No enclosure. Weld Number suppressed. Elliptical Weld Number enclosure.

OPT - 78

Switches by number Switches by name

- 110 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SUPPORT WELD NUMBER PREFIX AND ENCLOSURES

78 cont

SWITCH POSITION 6 - Weld Prefix on Offshore Support Welds 0 1 No Weld Prefix to be added. Support Weld Prefix to be added to Weld Number.

SWITCH POSITION 7 - Double Line Weld Number Enclosure Style for Fabrication Support Welds 0 1 Single line circle Weld Number enclosure. Double line Weld Number enclosure (use with circular enclosure to get double circles).

SWITCH POSITION 8 - Double Line Weld Number Enclosure Style for Erection Support Welds 0 1 Single line circle Weld Number enclosure. Double line Weld Number enclosure (use with circular enclosure to get double circles).

SWITCH POSITION 9 - Double Line Weld Number Enclosure Style for Offshore Support Welds Blank 1 Single line circle Weld Number enclosure. Double line Weld Number enclosure (use with circular enclosure to get double circles).

Details

OPT - 78

Switches by number Switches by name

- 111 -

ALIAS

79. Site Assembly Identification

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SITE ASSEMBLY IDENTIFICATION


Description

79

Allows identification of flanged assemblies on the isometric drawing using different enclosure types. It permits a table of assembly information to be positioned on the drawing frame. This can be either on a per drawing or per pipeline basis.

Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in nine parts. Output of flange assembly identification. Flange assembly identification not output. Numeric flange assembly identification. Alpha flange assembly identification. Flange assembly identification per drawing or per pipeline. Flange assembly identification per drawing. Flange assembly identification per pipeline. (Continued overpage)

SWITCH POSITION 1 0 1 2 SWITCH POSITION 2 0 1

Switch Layout

Switch Position

0
(5-8 unused) All settings All settings
Date

Version Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 85 - SITE ASSEMBLY IDENTIFICATION First 8.4.0 DEV. NO. 89H - MESSAGE ENCLOSURES Introduced Related Option Switches. Extended Use

JUL 00

8.10.0 MAY 02

Details Switches by number Switches by name

OPT - 79

- 112 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SITE ASSEMBLY IDENTIFICATION

79 cont

SWITCH POSITION 3 - Enclosure type. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 No enclosure. Diamond ended box enclosure. Round ended box enclosure. Triangular enclosure. Diamond enclosure. Square ended box enclosure. Circular enclosure. Double circle assembly enclosure. Elliptical assembly enclosure.

SWITCH POSITION 4 - Output of Flange Assembly Table. 0 1 Flange assembly table not required on drawing. Flange assembly table required on drawing.

SWITCH POSITIONS 5-8 - Unused. SWITCH POSITION 9 - Circular or Elliptical Weld Number Enclosures. 0 1 to 8 9 Weld Number circular or elliptical enclosures fixed to 2 characters. Weld Number circular or elliptical enclosures fixed to value set. Weld Number circular or elliptical enclosures variable sizes.

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Related Option Switches. Extended Use

Version

Date

Details

OPT - 79

Switches by number Switches by name

- 113 -

ALIAS

80. Dimensions - To valve centres

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DIMENSIONS - TO VALVE CENTRES


Description

80

Valves and straight through Instruments which have a Spindle may optionally be Dimensioned to their Centre Points rather than to their ends using either String or Composite Dimensions. Controls here permit the function to operate selectively, based upon the type of end connection, e.g. Socket Weld, Screwed, Compression, etc. This Option Switch can operate in conjunction with Option Switch 81 which adds bore selectivity.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in seven parts. SWITCH POSITION 1 - For Butt Weld end Valves and Instruments. 0 Default for components with Butt Weld ends to be Dimensioned across their length. 1 For components with Butt Weld ends to have Centreline Dimensions. SWITCH POSITION 2 - For Compression end Valves and Instruments. 0 Default for components with Compression ends to be Dimensioned across their length. 1 For components with Compression ends to have Centreline Dimensions. SWITCH POSITION 3 - For Screwed end Valves and Instruments. 0 Default for components with Screwed ends to be Dimensioned across their length. 1 For components with Screwed ends to have Centreline Dimensions. (Continued overpage)

Switch Layout

Switch Position

All Settings
Related Program Development Specs. Version Introduced Extended Use Date

DEV. NO. 59 - DIMENSIONING UPGRADE. First


Related Option Switches. O.S. 81 81

7.0

OCT 94

Details

OPT - 80

Switches by number Switches by name

- 114 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DIMENSIONS - TO VALVE CENTRES


Description

80 Contd.

Switch Settings

(Continued from previous page). SWITCH POSITION 4 - For Socket Weld end Valves and Instruments. 0 Default for components with Socket Weld ends to be Dimensioned across their length. 1 For components with Socket Weld ends to have Centreline Dimensions. SWITCH POSITION 5 - For Flanged end Valves and Instruments. 0 Default for components with Flanged ends to be Dimensioned across their length. 1 For components with Flanged ends to have Centreline Dimensions. SWITCH POSITION 6 - For Plain end Valves and Instruments. 0 Default for components with Plain ends to be Dimensioned across their length. 1 For components with Plain ends to have Centreline Dimensions. SWITCH POSITION 7 - For Hygienic end Valves and Instruments. Blank Default for components with Hygienic ends to be Dimensioned across their length. 1 For components with Hygienic ends to have Centreline Dimensions.

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Related Option Switches.

Version

Date

81

Extended Use

Details

OPT - 80

Switches by number Switches by name

- 115 -

ALIAS

81. Dimensions - Branches

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DIMENSIONS - BRANCHES
Description

81

This Option Switch controls two separate functions :i) Dimensions to the Centre Point of Valves and straight through Instruments selectively based upon bore. This operates in conjunction with O. S. 80 - which operates on End type. ii) Un-dimensioned Branch legs, selectively based upon Bore and / or on the number of components in the Branch
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in three parts. SWITCH POSITIONS 1, 2 & 3 - Dimensions to the Centre Point of Valves and straight through Instruments. 0 Default for Valves / Instruments that have their End Type set in O.S. 80 to be Dimensioned to their Centre Point. Value For Valves / Instruments that have their End Type set in O.S. 80 and have a Bore equal to or less than the Value set to be dimensioned to their Centre Point. Value is in 1/16" or mm's depending upon the Bore units. SWITCH POSITIONS 4, 5 & 6 -Branches within specified Bore range to be Un-dimensioned. (Works in conjunction with Positions 7 & 8, if set - see next page). 0 Default for all Branches to be Dimensioned. Value For Branches having a Bore equal to or less than Value to have Dimnsions suppressed. Value is in 1/16" or mm's depending upon the Bore units. (Continued overpage)

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Blank or Value

Zero or Value

Zero or Value
Version Introduced Extended Use Date

Related Program Development Specs.

DEV. NO. 59 - DIMENSIONING UPGRADE. First


Related Option Switches. O.S. 80 80

7.0

OCT 94

OPT - 81

Switches by number Switches by name

- 116 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DIMENSIONS - BRANCHES
Description

81 Contd.

Switch Settings

(Continued from previous page) SWITCH POSITIONS 7 & 8 - Branches with a specified number of components to be Un-dimensioned. (Works in conjunction with Positions 4, 5 and 6, if set, see previous page). Blank Default for all Branches to be Dimensioned. Value For Branches having a number of Components equal to or less than Value, to have Dimensions suppressed. Gasket and Bolt entries are counted as Components. Notes. i) Any Branch containing Pipe (100 record), Fixed Length Pipe (101 record) or Pipe Block (103 record) will not have Branch Dimension Suppression applied to it. ii) Branch Dimension Suppression using this Option Switch does not apply to Tapped Branches. iii) Switch Positions 4, 5 & 6 and 7 & 8 will work either independently of each other or together depending upon the Users requirements.

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Related Option Switches.

Version

Date

80

Extended Use

OPT - 81
Switches by number Switches by name

- 117 -

ALIAS

82. C of G / Weight output

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

C of G / WEIGHT OUTPUT
Description

82

This Option Switch allows the User to control the generation and output of additional Weight information not covered by Option Switch 41, plus a full range of C of G (Centre of Gravity) positions. Control over outputs for either single isometrics or the complete Pipeline is also provided.

Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in five parts.

SWITCH POSITION 1 - Outputs suppressed, by single isometric or by complete Pipeline. 0 None of the outputs controlled by this Option Switch are required. 1 All nominated outputs are required per Drawing or per Spool Drawing. 2 All nominated outputs are required per complete Pipeline. SWITCH POSITION 2 - Output of Wet (Full) Weight. 0 or blank Wet Weight Not required. 1 Wet Weight Is required. SWITCH POSITION 3 - Output of Insulation Weight. 0 or blank Insulation Weight Not required. 1 Insulation Weight Is required. (Continued overpage)

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Blank or Value

Zero, Blank or Value

Zero or Value
Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 64 - WEIGHT / C of G FACILITY. Related Option Switches. O.S. 41 41

7.2

FEB 95

OPT - 82
Switches by number Switches by name

- 118 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

C of G / WEIGHT OUTPUT
Description

82Contd.

Switch Settings

(Continued from previous page)

SWITCH POSITION 4 - Output of Dry (Empty) C of G positions. 0 or blank Dry (Empty) C of G position Not required. 1 Dry (Empty) C of G position Is required. 2 Dry (Empty) + Insulation C of G Is required. 3 Dry (Empty) C Of G and Dry (empty) + Insulation C of G Are both required. SWITCH POSITION 5 - Output of Wet (Full) C of G positions. Blank Wet (Full) C of G position Not required. 1 Wet (Full) C of G position Is required. 2 Wet (Full) + Insulation C of G Is required. 3 Wet (Full) C Of G and Wet (Full) + Insulation C of G Are both required.

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Related Option Switches.

Version

Date

41

Extended Use

OPT - 82
Switches by number Switches by name

- 119 -

ALIAS

83. Spare switch

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SPARE SWITCH
Description

83

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

OPT - 83

Switches by number Switches by name

- 120 -

ALIAS

84. Spare switch

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SPARE SWITCH
Description

84

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

OPT - 84

Switches by number Switches by name

- 121 -

ALIAS

85. Spare switch

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SPARE SWITCH
Description

85

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

OPT - 85

Switches by number Switches by name

- 122 -

ALIAS

86. Spare switch

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SPARE SWITCH
Description

86

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

OPT - 86

Switches by number Switches by name

- 123 -

ALIAS

87. Spare switch

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SPARE SWITCH
Description

87

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

OPT - 87

Switches by number Switches by name

- 124 -

ALIAS

88. Spare switch

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SPARE SWITCH
Description

88

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

Details

OPT - 88
Switches by number Switches by name

- 125 -

ALIAS

89. Spare switch

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SPARE SWITCH
Description

89

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

OPT - 89
Switches by number Switches by name

- 126 -

ALIAS

90. Material control - Comdace file contents

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

MATERIAL CONTROL COMDACE FILE CONTENTS


Description

90

This Option Switch controls whether information written to the COMPIPE Material Control File is per Isometric drawing (COMPIPE Section) or per Complete Pipeline. COMDACE is a registered trademark of John Brown Systems Ltd.

Switch Settings

0 1

Default for entries in the .MTO (Material Take-Off) file to be per Isometric Drawing (COMPIPE section). For entries in the .MTO (Material Take-Off ) file to be per Complete Pipeline.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Either Setting
Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 50 - ISOGEN TO COMPIPE LINK. Related Option Switches. O.S. 91 91 First Introduced Extended Use Version Date

5.10 6.0

APR 90 MAR 91

OPT - 90

Switches by number Switches by name

- 127 -

ALIAS

91. Material control - Comdace file controls

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

MATERIAL CONTROL COMDACE FILE CONTROLS


Description

91

Controls the following COMPIPE options :1) Whether User or Client Item Codes are to be used. 2) Whether Short or Long Component Descriptions are generated on all COMPIPE reports. 3) Whether Pipe Supports are to be included in the COMPIPE .MTO (Material Take-Off) file. COMDACE is a registered trademark of John Brown Systems Ltd.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in three parts.

SWITCH POSITION 1 - User or Client Item codes. 0 Default for User Item Codes to be used. 1 For Client Item Codes to be used. SWITCH POSITION 2 - Long or Short Descriptions. 0 or blank Default for Short Component Descriptions to be used. 1 For Long Component Descriptions to be used. SWITCH POSITION 3 - Pipe Supports in .MTO file. 0 or blank Default for Pipe Supports to be included in the COMPIPE .MTO file. 1 For Pipe Supports Not to be included.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

All All Either Setting Settings Setting


Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 50 - ISOGEN TO COMPIPE LINK. Related Option Switches. O.S. 90 90 First Introduced Extended Use Version Date

5.10 6.0

APR 90 MAR 91

Details Switches by number Switches by name

OPT - 91

- 128 -

ALIAS

92. DXF file units

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DXF FILE UNITS


Description

92

This Option Switch is used to identify the 'Units' setting for ALL DXF format files that are handled by the ISOGEN system. The actual Files used may be based upon either Imperial (Inches) or Metric (mm.) units and this Option Switch allows either one to be specified. This 'Units' value will apply to the following :i) Drawing Underlay (Drawing Frame) DXF files. ii) Detail Sketch DXF files. iii) Output (Plot) files generated in DXF format. All input files used in any run MUST be generated using the same Units. (As specified using this Option Switch. Any mis-match in Units that is permitted to occur between the DXF files generated will result in incorrectly sized drawings.

Switch Settings

0 1

Default for Metric Units - mm's. For Imperial Units - Inches.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Either Setting
Related Program Development Specs. Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

DEV. NO. 62 - DETAIL SKETCHES LOCATION FACILITY.


Related Option Switches. O.S. 71 71

7.0

OCT 94

Details Switches by number Switches by name

OPT - 92

- 129 -

ALIAS

93. Spare switch

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SPARE SWITCH
Description

93

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

Details

OPT - 93
Switches by number Switches by name

- 130 -

ALIAS

94. Spare switch

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SPARE SWITCH
Description

94

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

Details

OPT - 94

Switches by number Switches by name

- 131 -

ALIAS

95. Component leg length

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

COMPONENT LEG LENGTH


Description

95

This Option Switch gives User control over the Plotted Leg Lengths of Elbows and fitting Tees and Crosses. This Leg Length control facility does not apply to Fabricated (Pulled) Bends or Set-On (Stub-In) type Tees or Crosses. Pipe length scaling proportional to true length.
Switch Settings

SWITCH POSITION 1 0 Default for standard Leg Length of 9mm. SWITCH POSITION 2 Value Where Value is set to the required Leg Length in whole mms. e.g. For a 12mm Leg Length, enter 12. SWITCH POSITION 3 0 Normal pipe scaling used to determine pipe lengths. 1 Pipe lengths scaled proportionally to actual true lengths. Warning! - Use the Plotted Leg Length control with care. Long Leg Lengths take up more space on the drawing and can sometimes have an adverse effect on the finished isometric. The maximum value allowed is 18mm. The minimum value allowed is 6mm. (Continued overpage)
Switch Layout

Switch Position

Blank, 1 or 2

Zero

0 or 1

Zero or Value Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 53 - ISOPLOT PROGRAM UPDATE.

6.0 8.5.0 8.11.0

MAR 91 DEC 00 APR 03

Details Switches by number Switches by name

OPT - 95

- 132 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

COMPONENT LEG LENGTH


Description

95 Cont.

Different connection leg depictions allowed with Multi-Port components.

Switch Settings

( Continued from previous page )

SWITCH POSITION 4 0 Reserved

SWITCH POSITION 5 0 1 Dotted connection lines on all Multi-port fittings Dotted connection lines would only be generated when necessary for picture clarification (example - where 2 or more ports positioned on the same side with attached pipework running parallel to each other) No dotted connection lines shown

Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 53 - ISOPLOT PROGRAM UPDATE. First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

6.0 8.5.0

MAR 91 DEC 00

8.11.0 APR 03

OPT - 95

Switches by number Switches by name

- 133 -

ALIAS

96. Reserved

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

RESERVED
Description

96

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

OPT - 96

Switches by number Switches by name

- 131 -

ALIAS

97. Skew depiction - Individual / overall

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SKEW DEPICTION INDIVIDUAL / OVERALL


Description

97

This Option Switch controls how Skew pipe sections containing Branch connections are depicted in terms of the Skew indication on the isometric. Such Skews may be shown with either a series of separate Box / Triangle enclosures - one per Branch, or alternatively, a single overall one.

Switch Settings

0 1

Default for a Single Overall Box / Triangle enclosure around the complete Skew section. For individual Box / Triangle Skew enclosures to each Branch.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Either Setting
Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 53 - ISOPLOT PROGRAM UPDATE. Related Option Switches. O.S. 99 99 First Introduced Extended Use Version Date

6.0

MAR 91

Details

OPT - 97
Switches by number Switches by name

- 132 -

ALIAS

98. Spare switch

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SPARE SWITCH
Description

98

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

OPT - 98
Switches by number Switches by name

- 133 -

ALIAS

99. Skew depiction - Style

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SKEW DEPICTION - STYLE


Description

99

Controls whether Skewed pipe sections are drawn with either Box or Triangle Skew depiction on the isometric, together with the form of Skew Dimensioning to be used. A secondary option allows the selection of a mixture of 2D Skew Triangles and 3D Skew Box depiction. Skew Dimensioning options offer either normal Dimensioning format (with witness lines etc.) or a simplified form when using Skew Triangle format (actual Dimensions positioned along sides of Triangles with no witness lines)
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in three parts.

SWITCH POSITION 1 - Skew depiction style + Dimension style. 0 1 2 3 Default for Skew Box depiction with normal dimensioning. Dimension Line standout as per Option Switch 8. Skewed Triangle depiction with normal dimensioning. Dimension Line position as per Option Switch 8. Skewed Triangle depiction with normal dimensioning. Dimension Line position as per Option Switch 100. Skewed Triangle depiction with alternative dimensioning. Actual dimensions positioned close to sides of Triangle with no witness lines. Dimensions positioned in relation to Triangle as set in Option Switch 100 3 2 1 Switch Position

Switch Layout

Blank, 1 or 2

Blank or 1

All Settings

( Continued overpage )
Version Date

Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 11 - SKEWED (OFFSET) AND First FALLING PIPELINE INDICATION. Introduced Related Option Switches. O.S. 8 O.S. 67 O.S. 70 O.S. 97 O.S. 100 8 67 70 97 100 Extended Use

5.4 8.11.0

APR 87 APR 03

Details Switches by number Switches by name

OPT - 99

- 134 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SKEW DEPICTION - STYLE

99 Cont.

Switch Settings

( Continued from previous page )

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Mixture of 3D Boxes and 2D Triangles. 0 1 All Skew indications as set in Switch Position 1. For a Mixture of Skew indication types. 3D Skews indicated with Boxes. 2D Skews indicated with Triangles.

SWITCH POSITION 3 - Skew Angles 0 1 2 Skew angles not shown. Skew angles shown with arrow heads on the arc radius. Skew angles shown without arrow heads on the arc radius.

( NOTE - In order to use this facility the user is required to select Triangle depiction of the skewed section i.e. Position 1 of Option Switch 99 set to 1, 2 or 3. If Skew Box depiction is selected then no Skew Angles will be output )

Related Program Development Specs.

67

70

97

100
OPT - 99

Details Switches by number Switches by name

- 135 -

ALIAS

100. Skew depiction - Dimension line standout

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SKEW DEPICTION DIMENSION LINE STANDOUT


Description

100

Allows the Dimension Line Standout distance used on Box or Triangle Skew Dimensions to be varied from the value set in Option Switch 8.

Switch Settings

Default such that if Option Switch 99 = 0, 1, 2, 10, 11 or 12 then the Dimension Line Standout Setting defined in Option Switch 8 is used. Or, if Option Switch 99 = 3, or 13 then the default Dimension Position is 4 mm. Where Value is an alternative Dimension Line Standout in 1/10 mm. e.g. 120 = 12 mm.

Value

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Zero or Value
Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 11 - SKEWED (OFFSET) AND FALLING LINE INDICATION. Related Option Switches. O.S. 99 99 Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

5.4

APR 87

Details

OPT - 100

Switches by number Switches by name

- 136 -

ALIAS

101. Skew depiction - Triangle hatching

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SKEW DEPICTION TRIANGLE HATCHING


Description

101

Controls the features of the Skew Triangle Hatching facility. Hatching On / Off , the pitch and maximum length of the Hatching lines to be plotted can also be controlled.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in two parts.

SWITCH POSITIONS 1 & 2 - Hatching On / Off + Hatch Spacing. 0 Default to set Skew Hatching Off. 1 To set Skew Hatching On with a default Hatch Line pitch of 1 mm. Value Where Value equals an alternative Hatch Line pitch in 1/10 mm. e.g. For 2 mm Hatch Line pitch set 20. SWITCH POSITIONS 3 & 4 - Hatch Line Cut-Off Length. Blank Default for No Hatch Line Cut-Off value. All Triangles will be fully Hatched. Value Where Value equals Hatch Line Cut-Off Length in whole mm. e.g. For 25 mm cut-off value, enter 25. In this case Hatch lines in excess of 25 mm. long will not be plotted. This gives a partial Hatched effect.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Blank or Value
Related Program Development Specs.

All Settings
Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

DEV. NO. 11 - SKEWED (OFFSET) AND FALLING PIPELINE INDICATION. DEV. NO. 53 - ISOPLOT PROGRAM UPDATE.

5.4 6.0

APR 87 MAR 91

Related Option Switches. O.S. 99 99

Details Switches by number Switches by name

OPT - 101

- 137 -

ALIAS

102. Skew depiction - Hatching clearance

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SKEW DEPICTION HATCHING CLEARANCE


Description

102

Controls the physical size of the Un-hatched Gaps (White Areas) to be left local to the Pipeline, Pipeline In-line components and any Dimensions or Text elements that fall within any Skew Triangle Hatching.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in three parts.

SWITCH POSITIONS 1 & 2 - Gap local to Pipeline. 0 Default for Gap local to Pipeline of 2.5 mm. Value Where Value is an alternative Gap in 1/10 mm. SWITCH POSITIONS 3 & 4 - Gap local to In-line Components. 0 or blank Default for Gap local to In-line Components of 2.5 mm. Value Where Value is an alternative Gap in 1/10 mm. SWITCH POSITIONS 5 & 6 - Gap local to Dimensions and Text. Blank Default for Gap local to Dimensions/Text of 1.5 mm. Value Where Value is an alternative Gap in 1/10 mm

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Blank or Value
Related Program Development Specs.

Blank, Zero or Value

Zero or Value
Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

DEV. NO. 53 - ISOPLOT PROGRAM UPDATE. Related Option Switches.

6.0

MAR 91

101 O.S. 101

Details

OPT - 102
Switches by number Switches by name

- 138 -

ALIAS

103. Spare switch

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SPARE SWITCH
Description

103

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

OPT - 103

Switches by number Switches by name

- 139 -

ALIAS

104. Spare switch

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SPARE SWITCH
Description

104

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

OPT - 104
Switches by number Switches by name

- 140 -

ALIAS

105. Spare switch

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SPARE SWITCH
Description

105

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

OPT - 105
Switches by number Switches by name

- 141 -

ALIAS

106. Spare switch

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SPARE SWITCH
Description

106

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

OPT - 106
Switches by number Switches by name

- 142 -

ALIAS

107. Spare switch

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SPARE SWITCH
Description

107

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

OPT - 107

Switches by number Switches by name

- 143 -

ALIAS

108. Pipeline splitting - In tube

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

PIPELINE SPLITTING - IN TUBE


Description

108

Allows the User to control the actions to be taken by the program whenever the ISOGEN Automatic Pipeline Split facility selects a Split Point that is located in a straight length of Tube. There are three options, as described below.

Switch Settings

Default for Pipeline Splitting to function as normal when the Split point occurs along a section of Tube. The relevant Split Point information will be passed back to the 3D Design System via the Isometric Repeatability File, if being used. If a Pipeline Split occurs along a section of Tube, the Warning Message - "UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT POINT" is written to the Message File. No plots are produced and No information will be written to the Isometric Repeatability File for the Pipeline. If a Pipeline Split occurs along a section of Tube, the Warning Message - "UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT POINT" is written to the Message File. Plots are produced with the message "UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT" plotted at the top of each affected drawing. No information will be written to the Isometric Repeatability File for the Pipeline.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

All Settings
Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 48 - ISOMETRIC REPEATABILITY. Related Option Switches. O.S. 109 109 First Introduced Extended Use Version Date

6.0

MAR 91

Details Switches by number Switches by name

OPT - 108

- 144 -

ALIAS

109. Repeatability file content

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

REPEATABILITY FILE CONTENT


Description

109

Controls the type of Repeatability Information that is passed back to the host 3D Design System in the Isometric Return file. Also controlled is the actual Type of Return file that is required. The File Type options are :1) An old style system data file that only contains 'Successful Plot' information. (File identifier is FOR052). 2) A new style Return File that is generated as a system data file. (File identifier is FOR052). 3) A new style Return File that has a User defined file name. 4) A new style Return File that has additional spool information. 5) Option for ASCII output.
Switch Settings This Option Switch is in eight parts.

SWITCH POSITION 1 - Return File Type. 0 1 2 3 4 Default for Standard Return File type (FOR052) containing just a list of successfully processed pipelines. For New Style format using a User Named file or FOR052 System data file if there is No User Named file. For New Style Repeatability File containing new records for spool information. ASCII old style. ASCII new style.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Either Setting
Date Version Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 48 - ISO REPEATABILITY Phase I. First DEV. NO. 58 - ISO REPEATABILITY Phase II. MAR 91 Introduced 6.0 DEV.NO. 86H - REPEATABILITY FILE UPGRADE Related Option Switches. Extended Use

Details Switches by number Switches by name

7.0 8.5.4

OCT 93 DEC 00

ISSUE 3

OPT - 109

- 145 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

REPEATABILITY FILE CONTENT

109 Contd.

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Data Extraction Start Point 0 Default for the Data Extraction Start Point not to be written to the Return File. 1 For Data Extraction Start Point to be written to the Return File. SWITCH POSITION 3 - Pipeline Split Point Information 0 Default for Split Point Information Not to be written to the Return File. 1 For the Split Point to be written to the Return File. SWITCH POSITION 4 - Spool Number Identifier Information 0 Default for Spool Number Identifiers not to be written to the Return File. 1 For Spool Number Identifies to be written to the Return File. 2 For full alphanumeric Spool Identifiers to be written to the Return File. (Maximum of 4 characters). SWITCH POSITION 5 - Component Information 0 Default for Component Information not to be written to the Return File. 1 For Component Information to be written to the Return File. 2 For full alphanumeric Component Information to be written to the Return File. (Maximum of 4 characters). SWITCH POSITION 6 - By-pass component re-ordering 0 Re-ordering of components at By-pass closure points to be done. 1 No re-ordering of components at By-pass closure points. SWITCH POSITION 7 - Weld Number Information 0 Default for Weld Number Information not to be written to the Return File. 1 For Weld Number Information to be written to the Return File. SWITCH POSITION 8 - Material List Part Number Information Blank Default for Material List Part Number Information not to be written to the Return File. 1 For Material List Part Number to be written to the Return File.

Details Switches by number Switches by name

109

- 146 -

ALIAS

110. Ghost gaps

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

GHOST GAPS
Description

110

Controls the plotted length of a Ghost Gap element. (A Ghost Gap element is a physical 'Gap' on the plotted isometric that can be used when generating individual Pipeline isometrics, or as a link between related, but unconnected Pipelines on a 'System' type isometric).

Switch Settings

0 Value

Default for the normal Minimum Gap as controlled by the ISOGEN program. Where Value is the User defined Minimum Gap dimension in whole mm's.

Notes. The Smallest allowable Value is 18 mm. The Largest allowable Value is 60 mm. The program will default to using the appropriate Maximum Value if a setting outside these limits is detected.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Zero or Value
Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 47 - GHOST GAP FACILITY. First Introduced Extended Use Version Date

5.9

MAR 90

Details

OPT - 110

Switches by number Switches by name

- 147 -

ALIAS

111. Nozzles - Dotted

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

NOZZLES - DOTTED
Description

111

Controls whether or not Equipment Nozzle indicators are plotted (in dotted line style) on the isometric drawing. Also controls the calculation of of Nozzle Axes directions and insertion of this information into the PCF (Piping Component File) when using the PCFGEN program.

Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in two parts.

SWITCH POSITION 1 - Dotted Nozzle indication. 0 1 Default to suppress Dotted Nozzles. To have Dotted Nozzles plotted on the isometric.

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Nozzle Axis direction calculation. Blank 1 No calculation of Nozzle Axis direction. Nozzle Axis direction calculated and inserted into the PCF.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Blank or one
Related Program Development Specs.

Either Setting
Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

DEV. NO. 4 - DOTTED NOZZLE FACILITY.

2.0

AUG 85

PCFGEN JUL 95 1.0

Details Switches by number Switches by name

ISSUE 2

OPT - 111

- 148 -

ALIAS

112. Flow arrows - Pipeline

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

FLOW ARROWS - PIPELINE


Description

112

This Option Switch controls the use of Flow Arrows that are plotted directly on the pipe. Their purpose is to show the Pipeline's Fluid or Gas flow Direction. Note. A separate type of Flow Arrow which is plotted alongside in-line fittings may also be used, either as well as, or instead of this one on Pipe.

Switch Settings

0 1 Value

Default for Pipeline Flow Arrows to be plotted at the default scale factor of 8. For Pipeline Flow Arrows to be suppressed. For Pipeline Flow Arrows to be plotted at an alternative scale factor in the range Value 5 to 15 inclusive. (Value 5 gives smaller arrows, 15 larger).

Note. This type of Flow Arrow can only be generated if the relevant information is included in the Pipeline Input Data File.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Zero or Value
Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 7 - USER POSITIONED FLOW ARROWS. Related Option Switches. O.S. 17 17 Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

3.0

APR 86

Details

OPT - 112
Switches by number Switches by name

- 149 -

ALIAS

113. Material control - Pipeline identification

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

MATERIAL CONTROL PIPELINE IDENTIFICATION


Description

113

This Option Switch controls the format of the Pipeline Reference (that is, Name) that is passed to the ISOGEN Material Control Transfer (MATC) File.

Switch Settings

Default to pass the Full Pipeline Reference as contained in the PIPELINE-REFERENCE record. e.g. Pipeline Reference 6-LNG-6412A-CT15 in the Design Database remains the same in the Material Control file. To formulate a revised Pipeline Reference by stripping off the characters outside the first and last "-" delimiting character of the Pipeline Reference, removing the central "-" delimiter, and then passing the remaining character string. e.g. 6-LNG-6412A-CT15 is changed to LNG6412A in the Material Control file. Note. This is a very specific facility and will not function if the PIPELINE-REFERENCE in the Pipeline Input Data File is not in the exact form described above.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Either Setting
Related Program Development Specs. NONE First Introduced Extended Use Version Date

1.0

APR 83

OPT - 113
Switches by number Switches by name

- 150 -

ALIAS

114. Specification break indication

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

SPECIFICATION BREAK INDICATION


Description

114

This Option Switch controls the method to be used for the indication of Specification Breaks (Specification Changes) on the isometric. Two optional methods are available :i) Single Specification indication. Boxed message consisting of the New Specification Reference pointing to the position on the Pipeline where the change occurs. ii) Two Specification indication. Two boxed messages containing the Current and New Specification References, positioned at the point on the Pipeline where the change occurs.
Switch Settings

0 1

Default to obtain the single Specification Break indication box. To obtain the dual Specification Break indication boxes.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Either Setting
Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 15 - SPEC. BREAK INDICATION. First Introduced Extended Use Version Date

1.0 5.0

APR 83 OCT 86

Details

OPT - 114

Switches by number Switches by name

- 151 -

ALIAS

115. Tolerance - Angle offset

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

TOLERANCE - ANGLE OFFSET


Description

115

This Option Switch controls how small Angular deviations detected in the Pipeline Input Data File are to be interpreted and acted upon. These deviations can lead to small unwanted Skews being generated on the isometric. The User may define an Angular cut-off value with this switch whereby any Skew that is found to have an angular deviation below this value is ignored by the program and hence not treated as a Skew.
Switch Settings

0 Value

Default for No Angular Offset Tolerance to be set. Where Value is set to the required angle tolerance in 1/100 th. degree. e.g. For 0.5 degree cut-off, enter 50 .

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Zero or Value
Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 21 - SKEW BOX CUT-OFF TOLERANCE. Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

4.2

JUL 86

Details

OPT - 115
Switches by number Switches by name

- 152 -

ALIAS

116. Tolerance - Dimension offset

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

TOLERANCE - DIMENSION OFFSET


Description

116

This Option Switch controls how small Dimensional deviations detected in the Pipeline Input Data File are to be interpreted and acted upon. These deviations can lead to small unwanted Skews being generated on the isometric. The User may define a Dimensional cut-off value with this switch whereby any offset co-ordinate numerically below this value is ignored by the program and hence will not generate a Skew at this point.
Switch Settings

0 Value

Default for No Dimensional Offset Tolerance to be set. Where Value is set to the required Dimensional Tolerance in 1/100 th. millimetre. e.g. For 1.0 mm. cut-off, enter 100 .

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 21 - SKEW BOX CUT-OFF TOLERANCE. First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

4.2

JUL 86

Details

OPT - 116
Switches by number Switches by name

- 153 -

ALIAS

117. Dimension round off

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DIMENSION ROUND OFF


Description

117

This Option Switch controls the "Dimension Round Off Carry-Over function which is used to control how remainders are handled when dimensions are being calculated and output on the isometric. At Branch locations, this Option Switch permits the remainder part of a dimension either to be carried over and added to the next dimension, or discarded. An Override carry-over option beyond current component is also available
Switch Settings

Default for rounding off dimensions to + or - 1mm or 1/16th inch and carrying over any remainder to the next dimension. For rounding off dimensions to + or - 1mm or 1/16th inch with No carry-over of the remainder beyond a branch intersection For rounding off dimensions to + or - 1mm or 1/16th inch with No carry-over of the remainder beyond a current component

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Either Setting
Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 23 - SUPPRESSION OF DIMENSION ROUND OFF CARRY-OVER. Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

5.2 8.11.0

MAR 87 APR 03

OPT - 117

Switches by number Switches by name

- 154 -

ALIAS

118. Dimensions - Overall

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DIMENSIONS - OVERALL
Description

118

This Option Switch controls the use of Overall Dimensions. The controllable options are whether Overall Dimension are to be plotted or not, and if they are, which type. Also controllable is the Dimension Line Stand-Out distance. Overall Dimensions to Valve Centres are only available to Valves that have a Spindle.

Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in two parts. SWITCH POSITION 1 - Overall Dimensions On /Off and Type. 0 Default for No Overall Dimensions. 1 For Overall Dimensions On - going across Branches (e.g. Tees, Olets and Crosses). 2 For Overall Dimensions On - stopping at Branches (e.g. Tees, Olets and Crosses). 3 For Overall Dimensions On - going to Valve Centres and going across Branches (e.g. Tees, Olets and Crosses). 4 For Overall Dimensions On - going to Valve Centres but stopping at Branches (e.g. Tees, Olets and Crosses). (Continued over page)

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Blank or All Value Settings


Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 36 - OVERALL DIMENSIONS TO CENTRE-LINE OF VALVES. DEV. NO. 53 - ISOPLOT PROGRAM UPDATE. Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

5.9 7.0

MAR 90 OCT 93

Details

OPT - 118
Switches by number Switches by name

- 155 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DIMENSIONS - OVERALL
Description

118 Contd.

Switch Settings

(Continued from previous page)

SWITCH POSITIONS 2 & 3 - Overall Dimension Standout. Blank Default for No Overall Dimension Standout to be set. Program default will be used for all Overall Dimensions. Value Value is set to the User Specified Overall Dimension Standout distance in whole mm's. e.g. For 22 mm. set 22.

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

Details

OPT - 118
Switches by number Switches by name

- 156 -

ALIAS

119. Dimensions / elevations - Vertical

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DIMENSIONS / ELEVATIONS - VERTICAL


Description

119

This Option Switch controls how Vertical pipe positions are indicated on the isometric. These may be indicated either with normal Pipe Dimensions, in the form of vertical Co-ordinate Elevation (EL.) values, or a combination of both types.

Switch Settings

0 1

Default for normal Vertical pipe Dimensions. Elevations are also indicated at intersection points when the level changes. For all vertical pipe Dimensions to be suppressed and replaced by Elevations in the form of text messages at All positions where Dimensions would normally be output. For vertical Dimensions And Elevations output at All normal Dimensioning positions.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

All Settings
Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 18 - IMPROVED DIMENSIONING. First Introduced Extended Use Version Date

1.0 5.0

APR 83 OCT 86

Details

OPT - 119
Switches by number Switches by name

- 157 -

ALIAS

120. Tapping - Branch scale

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

TAPPING - BRANCH SCALE


Description

120

This Option Switch controls the plotted size of Tapped Branches. A Tapped Branch is a collection of components attached to a connection Tapping Point. This Switch is in 2 sections: i) Tapped Branches on actual Fitting Components i.e. Valves, Flanges etc. ii) Tapped Branches on pipe Type Components i.e. Elbows, Tees, Pipe etc. The components in a Tapped Branch may be scaled up or down from the size used for the main Pipeline.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in two parts. SWITCH POSITION 1, 2 & 3 - Tapped Branches on Fitting Components. Default for No Tapped Branch scaling. i.e. Tapped Branches shown the same size as the main Pipeline (100%). Where Value is a number that represents an alternative Tapped Branch scaling factor. e.g. Enter 110 to increase scaling, 90 to decrease scaling. (50% is the minimum recommended value).

Value

SWITCH POSITION 4 & 5 - Tapped Branches on Pipe type Components. Blank Default for Tapped Branch scaling at 65% of main Pipeline size. Value Where Value is a number that represents an alternative Tapped Branch scaling factor. e.g. Enter 80 to increase scaling, 45 to decrease scaling.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Blank, Zero or Value

Zero or Value
Version Date

Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 9 - FITTING TAP FACILITY. First DEV. NO. 70A - TAPS ON PIPE COMPONENTS Introduced Related Option Switches. O.S. 121 O.S. 122 121 122 Extended Use

5.0 7.14

MAR 87 MAR 98

Details

ISSUE 3

OPT - 120
Switches by number Switches by name

- 158 -

ALIAS

121. Tapping - Branch dimensions

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

TAPPING - BRANCH DIMENSIONS


Description

121

This Option Switch controls the Dimensioning of Tapped Branches. A Tapped Branch is a collection of components attached to a connection Tapping Point. This Switch is in 2 sections: i) Tapped Branches on actual Fitting Components i.e. Valves, Flanges etc. ii) Tapped Branches on Pipe Type Components i.e. Elbows, Tees, Pipe etc. Tapped Branches may be output on the isometric in either dimensioned, undimensioned or partially dimensioned form.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in two parts. SWITCH POSITION 1 - Tapped Branches on Fitting Components. 0 Default for Tapped Branch Dimensions On - as set for the main Pipeline. 1 2 For Tapped Branch Dimensions Off. For Tapped Branch Dimensions Off except for those on Pipe and Pipe Type Components.

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Tapped Branches on Pipe Components. blank Default for Tapped Branch Dimensions Off. 1 Tapped Branch Dimensions On. 2 For Tapped Branch Dimensions Off except for those on Pipe and Pipe Type Components.

Switch Layout

Position

Blank Zero or Value or Value


Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 9 - FITTING TAP FACILITY. First DEV. NO. 70A - TAPS ON PIPE COMPONENTS Introduced Related Option Switches. O.S. 120 O.S. 122 120 122 Extended Use Version Date

5.2 7.14

MAR 87 MAR 98

Details

ISSUE 3

OPT - 121
Switches by number Switches by name

- 159 -

ALIAS

122. Tapping - Branch co-ordinates

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

TAPPING - BRANCH CO-ORDINATES


Description

122

This Option Switch controls the output of Co-ordinates at Tapped Branch connection points. (i.e. The point on the host component that the Tapped Branch is connected to).

Switch Settings

0 1 2

Default for Tapping Point connection Co-ordinates Not to be plotted. For Tapping Point connection co-ordinates to be plotted. Tapping Point connection relative to component origin.

Switch Layout

0
Blank or Value
Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 9 - FITTING TAP FACILITY. DEV.NO.73B - TANGENTIAL BRANCH CONNECTIONS Related Option Switches. O.S. 120 O.S. 121

Switch Position

Either Setting
Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

5.2 8.8.0

MAR 87 JUN 01

Details

OPT - 122
Switches by number Switches by name

- 160 -

ALIAS

123. Instrument ID enclosure

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

INSTRUMENT ID ENCLOSURE
Description

123

This Switch controls the plotting of Instrument Name enclosures which may be Balloons, a variety of other box type enclosures, or no enclosure. In the case of Balloon type enclosures, when switched On, the Balloon diameter is always generated at a size that will enclose the maximum number of characters set in the Option Switch.

Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in 3 parts.

SWITCH POSITION 1 - For Balloon type enclosures. 0 Default for No Balloon around the Instrument Name. All the following values represent the number of plotted characters permitted on either line within the balloon (Maximum of two lines allowed). 1 For 1 character maximum on each line. 2 For 2 characters maximum on each line. 3 For 3 characters maximum on each line. 4 For 4 characters maximum on each line. 5 For 5 characters maximum on each line. Note. A two line Name output is derived by inputting a $ character in the Name at the point a new-line is required. (Continued overpage).
Switch Layout

Switch Position

Blank or Value
Related Program Development Specs.

Unused

Zero or Value
Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

DEV. NO. 10 - INSTRUMENT BALLOON FACILITY. VERSION 7 - RELEASE NOTES.

1.0 5.2 7.0

APR 83 MAR 87 OCT 93

Details Switches by number Switches by name

OPT - 123

- 161 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

INSTRUMENT ID ENCLOSURE
Description

123 Contd.

Switch Settings

(Continued from previous page). SWITCH POSITION 2 - Currently Unused. SWITCH POSITION 3 - For Box type enclosures. Blank Default for No Enclosure Box around the Instrument Name. 1 Diamond ended box enclosure. 2 Round ended box enclosure. 3 Triangle shaped box enclosure (2 characters maximum). * 4 Diamond shaped box enclosure (3 characters maximum). * 5 Square ended box enclosure. * Because these two enclosures cannot be elongated there is a limit on the number of characters that can be accommodated. Notes. i) When using any of the Box type enclosures, Switch Position 1 must be set to zero. ii) A two line Name output is derived by inputting a $ character in the Name at the point a new-line is required.

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

Details

OPT - 123

Switches by number Switches by name

- 162 -

ALIAS

124. Flange rotation angles

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

FLANGE ROTATION ANGLES


Description

124

This Switch controls the output of Flange Rotation Angles that are used by the Fabricator when welding on Flanges that have to be rotated away from the normal off centres axes. Although the facility may be used on all types of isometrics, it is of particularly benefit on Spool Isometrics. When the facility is switched on there are a variety of enclosure box styles that can be used for the output of Flange Rotation Angles on the isometric.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in 2 parts.

SWITCH POSITION 1 - Flange Rotation Angles plotted or not. 0 Default for No Flange Rotation Angles. 1 For Flange Rotation Angles to be output. SWITCH POSITION 2 - Enclosure Box type. Blank Default for Un-Boxed Angle output. 1 For Diamond ended enclosure box. 2 For Round ended enclosure box. 3 For Square ended enclosure box.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Blank or Either Value Setting


Related Program Development Specs. DEV. NO. 63(B) - FLANGE ROTATION ANGLES. First Introduced Extended Use Version Date

7.1

JUN 94

Details

OPT - 124
Switches by number Switches by name

- 163 -

ALIAS

125. Reserved

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

RESERVED
Description

125

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

OPT - 125

Switches by number Switches by name

- 164 -

ALIAS

126. Reserved

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

RESERVED
Description

126

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

OPT - 126

Switches by number Switches by name

- 165 -

ALIAS

127. Isogen version / run date

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

ISOGEN VERSION / RUN DATE


Description

127

This Switch controls the optional plotting of the ISOGEN Program Version Banner together with the Run Date and generation time of the isometric. When switched On, this information is plotted on a single line located at the bottom Left Hand corner of the isometric, but inside any Cut Marks that may be present. Alternatively, the Banner may be located just below the bottom outer line of the Drawing Frame.
Switch Settings

0 1 2

Default for the Banner Not to be plotted. Banner to be plotted. Special value for Alias Ltd laserprinter. (Moves the Banner inwards from the edge of the plot to prevent the printer from 'clipping' the message).

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Either Setting
Related Program Development Specs. NONE First Introduced Extended Use Version Date

1.0

APR 83

Details

OPT - 127

Switches by number Switches by name

- 166 -

ALIAS

128. Fab friendly isometrics

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

FAB FRIENDLY ISOMETRICS ( FFI )


Description

128

This Switch controls three FFI conditions :1) The Weld Type automatically inserted at Break Points between FFI's. 2) Which FFI Gaskets & Bolts should be associated with when an FFI Split occurs at a Flanged connection. 3) FFW Cutting Allowance association - to which side of a FFW which is located in Pipe should any Allowance be added to.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in 3 parts. SWITCH POSITION 1 - Type of Weld inserted at FFI Break Point. 0 Default for Site Weld (SKEY = WS). 1 For User defined choice - A Pop Up Menu will be displayed for the User to select the Weld choice (or No Weld). SWITCH POSITION 2 - Controls which FFI the generated Gaskets & Bolts should be associated with when an FFI Split occurs at a Flanged connection. Blank Default for program to always attach the Gaskets & Bolts to a detected flange. On a pair of Flanges, this will be the First Flange. 1 For User defined choice at most Flange positions. (Where a Flange is positioned at the 'End' of Pipeline or Branch then No choice is necessary). (Continued overpage)

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Blank or one
Related Program Development Specs.

Zero, blank Zero or or one one


Version First Introduced Extended Use Date

7.3

SEP 95

Details

ISSUE 2

OPT - 128
Switches by number Switches by name

- 167 -

ALIAS

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

FAB FRIENDLY ISOMETRICS ( FFI )


Description

128 Contd.

Switch Settings

(Continued from previous page)

SWITCH POSITION 3 - FFW Cutting Allowance Association. 0 Default to have any Allowance added to the First piece of pipe found in the Piping Data File sequence. 1 For User defined choice of nominating which side of an FFW is to carry any Allowance. (Once this option is selected the choice will have to be made at all FFW's in the Pipe).

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

Details

OPT - 128

Switches by number Switches by name

- 168 -

ALIAS

129. Interactive editing

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

INTERACTIVE EDITING
Description

129

This Option Switch activates the use of the Interactive Editing function within the SPOOLGEN system which is used to add supplementary information to Pipeline Input Data Files. Note. This option only operates on PC versions of ISOGEN running under the control of the SPOOLGEN system.

Switch Settings

0 1

Default for the Interactive Editing System not to be activated. To run the Interactive Editing System.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Either Setting
Related Program Development Specs. SPOOL DEFINITION SYSTEM. First Introduced Extended Use Version Date

7.1

JUN 94

Details Switches by number Switches by name

OPT - 129

- 169 -

ALIAS

130. Development testing

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DEVELOPMENT TESTING
Description

130

This Option Switch is a special one that is reserved for use only by the ISOGEN Administration Team for development and testing purposes. Users must leave the setting at the default value of zero (0).

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. NONE First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

1.0

APR 83

OPT - 130

Switches by number Switches by name

- 170 -

ALIAS

131. Development testing

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DEVELOPMENT TESTING
Description

131

This Option Switch is a special one that is reserved for use only by the ISOGEN Administration Team for development and testing purposes. Users must leave the setting at the default value of zero (0).

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. NONE First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

1.0

APR 83

OPT - 131

Switches by number Switches by name

- 171 -

ALIAS

132. Development testing

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DEVELOPMENT TESTING
Description

132

This Option Switch is a special one that is reserved for use only by the ISOGEN Administration Team for development and testing purposes. Users must leave the setting at the default value of zero (0).

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. NONE First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

1.0

APR 83

OPT - 132

Switches by number Switches by name

- 172 -

ALIAS

133. Development testing

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DEVELOPMENT TESTING
Description

133

This Option Switch is a special one that is reserved for use only by the ISOGEN Administration Team for development and testing purposes. Users must leave the setting at the default value of zero (0).

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. NONE First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

1.0

APR 83

OPT - 133

Switches by number Switches by name

- 173 -

ALIAS

134. Development testing

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DEVELOPMENT TESTING
Description

134

This Option Switch is a special one that is reserved for use only by the ISOGEN Administration Team for development and testing purposes. Users must leave the setting at the default value of zero (0).

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. NONE First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

1.0

APR 83

OPT - 134

Switches by number Switches by name

- 174 -

ALIAS

135. Development testing

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DEVELOPMENT TESTING
Description

135

This Option Switch is a special one that is reserved for use only by the ISOGEN Administration Team for development and testing purposes. Users must leave the setting at the default value of zero (0).

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. NONE First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

1.0

APR 83

OPT - 135

Switches by number Switches by name

- 175 -

ALIAS

136. Development testing

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DEVELOPMENT TESTING
Description

136

This Option Switch is a special one that is reserved for use only by the ISOGEN Administration Team for development and testing purposes. Users must leave the setting at the default value of zero (0).

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. NONE First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

1.0

APR 83

OPT - 136
Switches by number Switches by name

- 176 -

ALIAS

137. Development testing

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DEVELOPMENT TESTING
Description

137

This Option Switch is a special one that is reserved for use only by the ISOGEN Administration Team for development and testing purposes. Users must leave the setting at the default value of zero (0).

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. NONE First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

1.0

APR 83

OPT - 137

Switches by number Switches by name

- 177 -

ALIAS

138. Plotfile - DGN link and ASCII text

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

PLOTFILE - DGN LINK PLOTFILE - ASCII TEXT


Description

138

This Option Switch controls two functions related to the generation of DGN format isometric output files. On platforms that support the generation of DGN files, this Option Switch controls the creation of a link file between the ISOGEN system and the DGN software. An additional option allows the User to select ASCII Text characters (as an alternative to Vector text) for use within the DGN file.
Switch Settings

This Option Switch is in three parts. SWITCH POSITIONS 1, 2 & 3 - Currently Unused. 0 Must always be set to zero. SWITCH POSITION 4 - Generation of ASCII characters in DGN file. 0 or blank For default of Vector Text characters. 1 For generation of ASCII characters. SWITCH POSITION 5 - Generation of DGN format output files. 0 or blank For generation of normal plotfiles as nominated in Option Switch 71. 1 For generation of DGN format output files. Option Switch 71 must be set to a value of 6.

Switch Layout

Switch Position

Blank or Zero one Blank or one


Related Program Development Specs.

Zero
Version First Introduced Date

6.0

MAR 91

Related Option Switches. O.S. 71 71

Extended Use

OPT - 138

Switches by number Switches by name

- 178 -

ALIAS

139. Development testing

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DEVELOPMENT TESTING
Description

139

This Option Switch is a special one that is reserved for use only by the ISOGEN Administration Team for development and testing purposes. Users must leave the setting at the default value of zero (0).

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. NONE First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

1.0

APR 83

OPT - 139

Switches by number Switches by name

- 179 -

ALIAS

140. Development testing

ISOGEN
Switch Title

Options
Option Switch No.

DEVELOPMENT TESTING
Description

140

This Option Switch is a special one that is reserved for use only by the ISOGEN Administration Team for development and testing purposes. Users must leave the setting at the default value of zero (0).

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

Related Program Development Specs. NONE First Introduced Extended Use

Version

Date

1.0

APR 83

OPT - 140

Switches by number Switches by name

- 180 -

ALIAS

Plotfile length

PLOTFILE LENGTH

O.S. 1

Maximum Plotfile Length e.g. 3275 mm

This Option Switch only operates on plotters that use a plot roll rather than single sheets - and where OS 31 = 0 to obtain multiple isometrics in each plotfile like that shown above. (It is not effective if OS 31=1 - when each plotfile will contain only a single isometric - and hence is not used when single DXF or DGN plotfiles are produced for importing into a 2D graphics system like AutoCAD or MicroStation - when the isometrics are usually sent to a laser printer for plotting). Note. Some older plotters (like Benson Electrostatic) used to have a maximum plotfile length of 3275 mm which is the default value. Other similar plotters use a different maximum length value. Under these settings the program considers the physical drawing size and stacking arrangement - and will output the maximum number of isometrics it can into each plotfile produced. For example, if 20 isometrics were produced, you could get 3 plotfiles two with 8 isometrics each in them - and one with 4 isometrics.

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 181 -

ALIAS

Cut piece numbering / list type

CUT PIECE NUMBERING / LIST TYPE

O.S. 2

<4

>

This example shows Numeric Identifiers


<2>
<1 >

This is the New Style Cut Piece List (OS 2 Pos. 2 = 1) - the Old Style is no longer recommended.

Cut Piece identifiers are enclosed in brackets like this <1> The identifiers may be :Number based - like this or Alpha based -

<3>

<1> (OS 2 Pos. 3 = 0). <A> (OS 2 Pos. 3 = 1).

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 182 -

ALIAS

Drawing trim marks

DRAWING TRIM MARKS


N N N

O.S. 3

Drawing Height

Drawing Width

Drawing Trim Marks

Like OS1 - the facility provided by this Option Switch is really only beneficial on plotters that use a plot roll rather than single sheets. Drawing Trim Marks are plotted at the extremities of each isometric drawing - the distance away from the frame being the margin settings. Trimming to the marks provides the exact drawing size.

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 183 -

ALIAS

Drawing text size

DRAWING TEXT SIZE

O.S. 4

Controls the text size for all generated characters in this region of the isometric.
SMALL CHARACTERS - 2.1 MM

MEDIUM CHARACTERS - 2.4 MM

LARGE CHARACTERS - 2.8 MM

EXTRA LARGE CHARACTERS - 3.5 MM

EXTRA LARGE CHARACTERS - 4.2MM

EXTRA LARGE CHARACTERS - 4.9MM

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 184 -

ALIAS

Co-ordinates: Connection/connectivity

CO-ORDINATES - CONNECTION/ CONNECTIVITY

O.S. 5

POS 1 = 0

POS 1 =1

POS 2 = 0

POS 2 = 1

This text is on ATEXT -240

This text is on ATEXT -240

POS 3 = 0

POS 3 = 1

1 OF 3

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 185 -

ALIAS

CO-ORDINATES - CONNECTION/ CONNECTIVITY


Text is on ATEXT -241 Text is on ATEXT -241

O.S 5

POS 4 = 0

POS4 =1

POS 5 = 0

POS 5 = 1

POS 6 = 0
ALIAS

POS 6 = 1

2 OF 3

Return to front sheet

- 186 -

ALIAS

CO-ORDINATES - CONNECTION/ CONNECTIVITY

O.S. 5

Text is on ATEXT -242 Text is on ATEXT -242

POS 7 = 0

POS 7 =1

Text comes from the -47 record

Text comes from the -47 record

POS 8 = 0

POS 8 =1
3 OF 3

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 187 -

ALIAS

Date output

DATE OUTPUT

O.S. 6

Date formats
British 28 MAR 96 European28/03/96 American03/28/96 No Date output on Iso - OS 6 = 0 - OS 6 = 1 - OS 6 = 2 - OS 6 = 3

.......................... 28/03/96........ .......................... .......................... .......................... .......................... .......................... .......................... .......................... ..........................

These settings use the Date entry in the Piping Data File (IDF or PCF)

British 21 APR 96 European21/04/96 American04/21/96

- OS 6 =10 - OS 6 = 11 - OS 6 = 12

These settings get the Date entry from your computer on the day of processing

The word DATE is in ATEXT -250 Month names are in ATEXT's -258 to -269

Use the ISOGEN -14 record to position the Date with TEXTPOS (Text Positioning).

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 188 -

ALIAS

Pipeline splitting: User control

PIPELINE SPLITTING - USER CONTROL

O.S. 7

Set OS 7 = 0 for automatic drawing splitting (this is the normal setting) - the amount of information on each DRG is controlled by the program but may be increased or decreased by use of OS 38

N N N
3/3 2/3 1/3

Alternatively - to override N automatic splitting - set the Switch value to required number of DRG's e.g. For 2 DRG's set OS 7 = 2
1/2

2/2

Warning ! A dictated number of DRG's would only be set for a single nominated pipeline - on completion of which the value should be reset to 0

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 189 -

ALIAS

Dimension line standout

DIMENSION LINE STANDOUT

O.S. 8

Layer 2 STRING / COMPOSITE Layer 1 MESSAGES / SUPPORTS

Layer 3 OVERALL

Dimension Standout Distance varies with the character text size Small text OS 4 = 1 Layer 1 - 6 mm Layer 2 - 12 mm Layer 3 - 18 mm Medium text OS 4 =0 Layer 1 - 7 mm Layer 2 - 14 mm Layer 3 - 21 mm Large text OS 4 = 2 Layer 1 - 8 mm Layer 2 - 16 mm Layer 3 - 24 mm

Extra Large text OS 4 = 3 Layer 1 - 9 mm Layer 2 - 18 mm Layer 3 - 27 mm

Extra Large text OS 4 =4 Layer 1 - 10 mm Layer 2 - 20 mm Layer 3 - 30 mm

Extra Large text OS 4 = 5 Layer 1 - 11 mm Layer 2 - 22 mm Layer 3 - 33 mm

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 190 -

ALIAS

Dimension form

DIMENSION FORM
String Dimensions OS 9 Pos. 1 = 0

O.S. 9
Composite Dimensions OS 9 Pos. 1 = 3

1 of 3

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 191 -

ALIAS

DIMENSION FORM
String, Support / Message & Reference Dimensions all ON OS 9 Pos. 1 = 0
Reference Dimension

O.S. 9

Message Dimension

String & Support / Message Dimensions Suppressed. Only Reference Dimensions ON OS 9 Pos. 1 = 1

String Dimensions Suppressed. Support / Message & Reference Dimensions ON OS 9 Pos. 1 = 2

2 of 3

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 192 -

ALIAS

DIMENSION FORM
Full String Dimensions OS 9 Pos. 1 = 4

O.S. 9

Gasket Dimensioning. (Gaskets here are 2 mm thick)

OS 9 Pos. 2 = 0 (Gasket thickness not included) American style Dimensions. (Dimension on top of line). OS 9 Pos. 3 = 1

OS 9 Pos. 2 =1 (Gasket thickness is included)

3 of 3

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 193 -

ALIAS

Drawing margins

DRAWING MARGINS
Top OS 12

O.S. 10, 11, 12, 13

Drawing Frame

Left OS 10

Right OS 11

Bottom OS 13

Paper Size e.g. A2 , ANSI 'C size, etc.

Note. These Margins must be set when using either :w The standard ISOGEN Drawing Frame
w

or

A User Defined Drawing Frame

Also - a large side margin (left or right) must be set to suit the width of a Style 3 or 4 BOM.

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 194 -

ALIAS

Drawing size: Postscript plotter size

DRAWING SIZE - STANDARD & POSTSCRIPT PLOTTER SIZE


N

O.S. 14

Standard Paper Size e.g. A2, ANSI 'C' size, etc.

This OS sets standard Drawing sizes - All the European 'A' series paper sizes or the American ANSI sizes ('A' to 'E'). (For non-standard Drawing sizes - use OS 15 & 16). Switch Positions 3 & 4 permits 'direct' PostScript files to be plotted at a reduced scale.
N

Apparent size to ISOGEN - A2

Actual plotted size - A3

Note. This effect can also be achieved by plotting out of a 2D graphics system - like AutoCAD or MicroStation.

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 195 -

ALIAS

Drawing size: Height and width

DRAWING SIZE - HEIGHT & WIDTH

O.S. 15, 16

Height

Width

This OS sets non-standard Drawing sizes . e.g. For a Drawing 300 mm High X 400 mm Wide Set OS 15 = 300 & OS 16 = 400 (For standard Drawing sizes - use OS 14).

Notes. Any settings in these two Option Switches causes any setting in OS 14 Pos. 1 & 2 to be ignored. wHowever, any setting in OS 14 Pos. 3 & 4 will not be ignored. This means 'direct' PostScript files of a non-standard Drawing size may produced at a reduced scale - in the same way that standard Drawings can be.

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 196 -

ALIAS

Flow Arrows: On components

FLOW ARROWS - ON COMPONENTS

O.S. 17

The arrow direction (and hence fluid flow or gas flow direction) is controlled from the 3D Design System. When called for by setting OS 17 = 0 - most normal in-line components will have this Flow Arrow plotted alongside. Note that there is an alternative type of Flow Arrow to this one. See OS 112 for details of a Flow Arrow that is plotted directly on the Pipe. It is normal to use only one of the available Flow Arrows. Most Users now prefer the one controlled from OS 112.

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 197 -

ALIAS

Drawing frame: Program standard

DRAWING FRAME - PROGRAM STANDARD

O.S. 18

This OS allows you to switch the standard ISOGEN Drawing Frame ON or OFF.
N

Drawing Frame ON OS 18 = 0 This is the default


4-AR-4000

Drawing Frame OFF OS 18 = 1

4-AR-4000

The standard Drawing Frame is always switched OFF when you are employing a User Defined Backing Frame. For full details of the techniques used in making User Defined Backing Frames - see the Training Slide that covers all aspects of that facility.

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 198 -

ALIAS

Sloping pipeline indication method

SLOPING PIPELINE INDICATION METHOD

O.S. 19

This is how Falling Pipelines are indicated. The default setting of value zero shows the Falls angle in Degrees like that above. Values of 1 to 5 show the Fall expressed in alternative ways. A Value of 6 suppresses the Fall indication altogether - like this

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 199 -

ALIAS

Sloping pipeline indication limit

SLOPING PIPELINE INDICATION LIMIT

O.S. 20

This Option Switch works in conjunction with OS 19. It sets the cut-off value that determines what steepness of slope should be shown as a Fall - and what should not. Referring to the example on slide OS 19 - if the cut-off value for that pipeline was set to 4 (it was set to 6) then the slope would be shown like this.

This is because the actual slope is now steeper than the cut-off value.

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 200 -

ALIAS

Isometric type

ISOMETRIC TYPE

O.S. 21

OS 21 = 0 Combined isometric - A Full size iso containing Erector and Fabricator information Fab materials

Erection materials

1 OF 7

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 201 -

ALIAS

ISOMETRIC TYPE

O.S. 21

OS 21 = 1 Erection / Offshore isometric - A Full size iso containing only Erector Information Erection or Offshore materials only

2 OF 7

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 202 -

ALIAS

ISOMETRIC TYPE

O.S. 21

OS 21 = 2 Fabrication isometric - A Full size iso containing only Fabrication Information Fab materials only

3 OF 7

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 203 -

ALIAS

ISOMETRIC TYPE

O.S. 21

OS 21 = 6 Spool isometric - Smaller size isos containing only single pipe spools - with 'as-built' orientation

4 OF 7

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 204 -

ALIAS

ISOMETRIC TYPE

O.S. 21

OS 21 = 4 Spool isometric - Smaller size isos containing only single pipe spools with 'flat' orientation

5 OF 7

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 205 -

ALIAS

ISOMETRIC TYPE

O.S. 21

OS 21 = 10 A special type of isometric which has no pipeline graphics.

The drawing region is left blank for the pipeline isometric to be added - either manually or with a 2D draughting system. 6 OF 7

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 206 -

ALIAS

ISOMETRIC TYPE

O.S. 21

OS 21 =100 A special Test isometric. This example is Combined isometric

On a test isometric all numeric values are substituted with a string of XXXX characters like this

7 OF 7

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 207 -

ALIAS

Cut piece add-on allowances

CUT PIECE ADD-ON ALLOWANCES


Actual position Added on length of cut pipe (e.g. 175 mm) - to allow for adjustment of pipe on site before welding on flange

O.S. 22

Nominal position of Loose flange

Normal cut length Increased cut length

1) Loose Flange
Nominal Position of Field Fit Weld

Actual position

Nozzle

Normal cut length Increased cut length

2) FFW

Normal cut length Increased cut length

3) Shop Test Weld

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 208 -

ALIAS

Material list: Controls and file type

MATERIAL LIST - CONTROLS & M/C FILE TYPE O.S. 23

OS 23 = 100 - Style 1 Material List This is the Standard BOM - it has fixed content and layout It does not require an MLD control file

1 of 9

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 209 -

ALIAS

MATERIAL LIST - CONTROLS & M/C FILE TYPE O.S. 23

'U' Pre-fixes on Bends

Separate material entries

'B' Pre-fix on field welds

OS 23 = 110 - Special Type Material List Used by Siemens - is a variation on Style 1 Does not require an MLD control file 2 of 9

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 210 -

ALIAS

MATERIAL LIST - CONTROLS & M/C FILE TYPE

O.S. 23

OS 23 = 200 - Style 2 Material List Has the overall appearance of a Style 1 but this of Style of BOM has User defined content and layout Requires an MLD control file 3 of 9

Return to front sheet

- 211 -

ALIAS

MATERIAL LIST - CONTROLS & M/C FILE TYPE

O.S. 23

23

OS 23 = 220 - Style 2 Material List Same as the previous example except here, Alphabetic pointers are used Requires an MLD control file 4 of 9

Return to front sheet

- 212 -

ALIAS

MATERIAL LIST - CONTROLS & M/C FILE TYPE

O.S. 23

ALIAS

OS 23 = 300 - Style 3 Material List Uses a completely different concept to Style 1 or 2 - this type is plotted onto a User defined backing sheet where each BOM entry is positioned at a specific X-Y co-ordinate position Requires an MLD control file containing basic X-Y co-ordinate details For further information - see the Material List slides 5 of 9

Return to front sheet

- 213 -

ALIAS

MATERIAL LIST - CONTROLS & M/C FILE TYPE

O.S. 23

Spool Information

All materials except Gaskets & Bolts have unique suffix type ID numbers e.g. this ALIAS elbow is part number 6.4

OS 23 = 400 - Style 4 Material List Same concept as Style 3 but this one also shows material usage for each Spool Like the Style 3 - requires an MLD control file containing basic X-Y co-ordinate details

6 of 9

Return to front sheet

- 214 -

ALIAS

MATERIAL LIST - CONTROLS & M/C FILE TYPE

O.S. 23

OS 23 = 10200 - Another type of Style 2 Material List Here, there are no sub-headings and the BOM is partitioned into groups Requires an MLD control file

7 9 3 of 3

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 215 -

ALIAS

MATERIAL LIST - CONTROLS & M/C FILE TYPE

O.S. 23

-6 -14 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12 -14 -17 -19 50 60 100 -20 100 -20 200 -20 200 -20 200 -20 300 -20 300 -20 400 -20 400 -20 500 -20 500 -20

6"-ASC-6900 02/08/96 1 P-5000 AR-102 CS-150 150# 01/03/96 PNT-23 200C 4 1 1 0 120 96 146 64 96 0 0 149 PAW-40 64 0 0 7 PAW-40 96 96 0 1 TAMF-6X6 96 64 0 2 RAM-E40FF-6X4 96 0 0 3 EAM-90L40 96 0 0 1 FAM-150WN40 64 0 0 2 FAM-150WN40 96 0 0 1 JFA-150R2 64 0 0 2 JFA-150R2 12 0 0 8 BAA-3/4X85 10 0 0 16 BAA-5/8X75

0 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 85 75

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

OS 23 Position 4 = 0 - Showing Standard Material Control File output This can be loaded into the Users Material Control System This is the old original type containing fixed, non-User defined information
8 of 9

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 216 -

ALIAS

MATERIAL LIST - CONTROLS & M/C FILE TYPE

O.S. 23

PIPELINE REF -------6"-ASC-6900 6"-ASC-6900 6"-ASC-6900 6"-ASC-6900 6"-ASC-6900 6"-ASC-6900 6"-ASC-6900 6"-ASC-6900 6"-ASC-6900 6"-ASC-6900 6"-ASC-6900

DRG NO --1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ITEM CODE ---PAW-40 PAW-40 TAMF-6X6 RAM-E40FF-6X4 EAM-90L40 FAM-150WN40 FAM-150WN40 JFA-150R2 JFA-150R2 BAA-3/4X85 BAA-5/8X75

MAIN BORE ---6 4 6 6 6 6 4 6 4 3/4 5/8

SEC BORE ---6 4 6 4 6 6 4 6 4 3/4 5/8

QTY --14.863 M 0.674 M 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 8 16

OS 23 Position 4 = 1 - Showing User Defined Material Control File output This type permits variable content and layout It requires an MLD File This can also be loaded into the Users Material Control System

9 of 9

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 217 -

ALIAS

Material list: Pipeline/drawing

MATERIAL LIST - PIPELINE / DRAWING

O.S. 24

OS 24 Position 1 controls whether Material Lists are produced by :w Drawing - OS 24 Pos 1 = 0 w Pipeline - OS 24 Pos 1 = 1 w Drawing (spool iso material part numbers will match full iso material part numbers) - OS 24 Pos 1 = 2 w Pipeline (spool iso material list numbers will match full iso material list numbers) - OS 24 Pos 1 = 3 However, this is only relevant on Split isos having more than 1 drawing Case 1) OS 24 Pos 1 = 0 - Material List by Drawing OS 24 Pos 1 = 3 - Material list by Drawing (appears in this form on both full and spool isos, all part numbers match) These are individual Drawing totals

DRG 1/2

DRG 2/2

1 OF 3

Return to front sheet

- 218 -

ALIAS

MATERIAL LIST - PIPELINE / DRAWING

O.S. 24

Case 2)

OS 24 Pos 1 = 1 - Material List by Pipeline OS 24 Pos 1 = 3 - Material list by Pipeline (appears in this form on both full and spool isos, all part numbers match)

These are grouped up totals - for the complete pipeline

DRG 1/2

DRG 2/2 (BOM area is blank)

2 OF 3

Return to front sheet

- 219 -

ALIAS

MATERIAL LIST - PIPELINE / DRAWING

O.S. 24

OS 24 Position 2 controls the way Pipe Lengths are reported on the BOM There are 3 styles each for Metric and Imperial lengths

Metric - OS 24 Pos 2 = Blank

Imperial - OS 24 Pos 2 = Blank

Metric - OS 24 Pos 2 = 1
ALIAS

Imperial - OS 24 Pos 2 = 1

Metric - OS 24 Pos 2 = 2

Imperial - OS 24 Pos 2 = 2 3 OF 3

Return to front sheet

- 220 -

ALIAS

Material list position

MATERIAL LIST - POSITION

O.S. 25

OS 25 Position 1 controls the location of where the BOM is plotted - on the Left Hand or Right Hand side of the isometric This only affects Styles 1 & 2 Material Lists, not Style 3 & 4

OS 25 Pos 1 = 0 BOM on LH side

OS 25 Pos 1 = 1 BOM on RH side

1 of 4

Return to front sheet

- 221 -

ALIAS

TITLE BLOCK - POSITION


OS 25 Position 2 controls where the Title Block is printed relative to the BOM It may be :w In the default position at the bottom RH corner w Printed at the bottom of the BOM w Suppressed completely

O.S. 25

OS 25 Position 2 = blank Title Block in default position

2 of 4

Return to front sheet

- 222 -

ALIAS

TITLE BLOCK - POSITION

O.S. 25

ALIAS

OS 25 Position 2 = 1 Title Block at bottom of BOM

3 of 4

Return to front sheet

- 223 -

ALIAS

TITLE BLOCK - POSITION

O.S. 25

OS 25 Position 2 = 2 Title Block suppressed

4 of 4

Return to front sheet

- 224 -

ALIAS

Material list: Descriptions

MATERIAL LIST - DESCRIPTIONS

O.S. 26

Switch Position 1 to suppress Item Descriptions only applies to Style 1 BOM as this function is controlled from the MLD for all other Styles (2, 3 and 4)

Example 1 - Style 1 BOM with OS 26 = 0


No Descriptions

ALIAS

No Blank Lines between entries

Example 2 - Style 1 BOM with OS 26 = 11

Return to front sheet

- 225 -

ALIAS

Material list: Text size

MATERIAL LIST - TEXT SIZE

O.S. 27

Controls the text size for all generated characters in this region of the isometric.
ALIAS

SMALL CHARACTERS - 2.1 MM

MEDIUM CHARACTERS - 2.4 MM

LARGE CHARACTERS - 2.8 MM

EXTRA LARGE CHARACTERS - 3.5 MM

EXTRA LARGE CHARACTERS - 4.2MM

EXTRA LARGE CHARACTERS - 4.9MM

Return to front sheet

- 226 -

ALIAS

Material list: Item code length

MATERIAL LIST - ITEM CODE LENGTH

O.S. 28

The longest Item Code on this the project for this example is 13 characters. Hence, OS 26 should be set to 13.
ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 227 -

ALIAS

Material list: Line spacing

MATERIAL LIST - LINE SPACING

O.S. 29

The BOM listing can be made to look shorter or longer by changing the Line Spacing

100%

90%

Full length BOM list OS 29 = 0 or 100


ALIAS

Shorter BOM list OS 29 = 90

Return to front sheet

- 228 -

ALIAS

Material list: Continuation method

MATERIAL LIST - CONTINUATION METHOD

O.S. 30

BOM Overflow onto second Material List area

LSS250

Case 1 - OS 30 = 0

LSS250

1/2

N
ALIAS

BOM overflow onto Dummy '2 OF 2' sheet

LSS250

2/2

Case 2 - OS 30 = 1

1 OF 2

Return to front sheet

- 229 -

ALIAS

MATERIAL LIST - CONTINUATION METHOD


N

O.S. 30

LSS250

1/1

BOM overflow onto Dummy '1A' sheet

Case 3 - OS 30 = 2
LSS250 1A

Case 4 - OS 30 = 10
ALIAS

Single sheet isometric called 1/1

MSS150

1/1

2 OF 2

Return to front sheet

- 230 -

ALIAS

Drawing output: File/screen

DRAWING OUTPUT - FILE / SCREEN


OS 31 = 0 (and OS 1 = 3275)

O.S. 31
N

Multiple isometrics all in one plotfile (Most economic method when plotfiles are going straight to a paper roll type plotter) OS 31 = 1

Iso 1

Iso 2

Iso 3

Iso 4

Each isometric produced in a separate plotfile (Used when plotfiles are DXF or DGN for loading into a 2D graphics system or when plotfiles are going straight to a laser printer)

OS 31 = 2
N

Isometrics sent to the screen (Does not work on PC)

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 231 -

ALIAS

Drawing output: Scaling

DRAWING OUTPUT - SCALING

O.S. 32

N OS 32 = 0 or 100 (Default)

CWS100
Full size isometrics

OS 32 = 71 (71% of nominated Drawing size)

CWS100

Reduced size isometrics Notes 1) With this Option Switch the whole of the isometric (frame and inner contents) is re-scaled 2) If you are using a 2D graphics system such as AutoCAD and you want to produce scaled down isometrics (e.g. effectively A2 size - but scaled down to A3 on output) then that reduction should be done in the graphics system, not with this Option Switch

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 232 -

ALIAS

Drawing output: Picture scale

DRAWING OUTPUT - PICTURE SCALE

O.S. 34

N OS 34 = 0 or 100 (Default)

CWS100
Normal picture scale

N OS 34 = 150 (150% of nominated Drawing size)

CWS100
Increased picture scale

Unlike OS 32 - this Option Switch only affects the picture part of the isometric. Everything else remains the same size.

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 233 -

ALIAS

Drawing: Reserved areas

DRAWING - RESERVED AREAS

O.S. 35

Reserved Area distance for Drawing Region

Reserved Area distance for Material List

Reserved Area is actually a distance setting which must always be in mm's - even if you are an Imperial Units User

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 234 -

ALIAS

Drawing output: Stacking value

DRAWING OUTPUT - STACKING VALUE

O.S. 36

Single stacking OS 36 = 0 or 1

ALIAS

Double stacking OS 36 = 2

Like OS 1 - this Option Switch only operates on plotters that use a plot roll rather than single sheets - and where OS 31 = 0 to obtain multiple isometrics in each plotfile like that shown above.

Return to front sheet

- 235 -

ALIAS

Drawing output: Stacking orientation

DRAWING OUTPUT - STACKING ORIENTATION

O.S. 37

Along the plot roll OS 37 = 0

ALIAS

Across the plot roll OS 37 = 1

Again, this Option Switch only operates on plotters that use a plot roll rather than single sheets - and where OS 31 = 0 to obtain multiple isometrics in each plotfile like that shown above.

Return to front sheet

- 236 -

ALIAS

Pipeline splitting: Automatic

PIPELINE SPLITTING - AUTOMATIC


Example of Pipeline Splitting.
N

O.S. 38

WS150 DRG 1/2


N

WS150 DRG 2/2

Here, OS 38 is set to the default value 0 (or 100). The result is two drawings - each with approximately the same amount of information 1 OF 2

Return to front sheet

- 237 -

ALIAS

PIPELINE SPLITTING - AUTOMATIC

O.S. 38

WS150 DRG 1/1

By setting OS 38 to value 120 - more information will be forced onto each drawing. This results in only a single drawing being produced.
ALIAS

Note that care should be taken when specifying values > 100 . In this respect the User takes full responsibility for the output results !

2 OF 2

Return to front sheet

- 238 -

ALIAS

Spool piece identifiers

SPOOL PIECE IDENTIFIERS


These are the two automatic Spool Piece Identifier types

O.S. 39

OS 39 = 0 Numeric System

[D

[B

[A

OS 39 =2 Alphabetic System
[C]

1 OF 3

Return to front sheet

- 239 -

ALIAS

SPOOL PIECE IDENTIFIERS


This is how User Defined Spool Identifiers look :-

O.S. 39

SPL A

NS 4"

14

9 35

These Identifiers may either be entered in the model by the 3D Designer - or probed in using SPOOLGEN

OS 39 = 0

ALIAS

2 OF 3

Return to front sheet

- 240 -

ALIAS

SPOOL PIECE IDENTIFIERS

O.S. 39

These are alternative enclose types - controlled by OS 39 position 3

10

OS 39 Pos 3 = 1

SPL A

10

OS 39 Pos 3 = 2

SPL A

OS 39 Pos 3 = 3

OS 39 Pos 3 = 4
SPL A

10

OS 39 Pos 3 = 5

The are all obtainable with either Automatic or User Defined Spool Identifiers
ALIAS

OS 39 position 4 controls how Spool Drawings are identified

SPL A

6"-ASC-6000 SPL A

OS 39 Pos 4 = 0
5

OS 39 Pos 4 = 1 3 OF 3

Return to front sheet

- 241 -

ALIAS

Pipe supports

PIPE SUPPORTS

O.S. 40

OS 40 = 0 String Dimensions for Pipe Supports

ALIAS

OS 40 = 1 Overall Dimensions for Pipe Supports

1 OF 3

Return to front sheet

- 242 -

ALIAS

PIPE SUPPORTS

O.S. 40

OS 40 = 2 Pipe Supports Suppressed

ALIAS

OS 40 = 3 Pipe Supports drawn but Un-dimensioned 2 OF 3

Return to front sheet

- 243 -

ALIAS

PIPE SUPPORTS

O.S. 40

OS 40 = 10 Pipe Support Dimensions on Opposite Side

ALIAS

OS 40 = 2500 Pipe Support Standout Distance = 25 mm (Which forces the Standout outside the normal dimension)

3 OF 3

Return to front sheet

- 244 -

ALIAS

Bore/dimension/weight control

BORE / DIMENSION / WEIGHT CONTROL


E 44998 N 225000 EL +35000
4"N S

O.S. 41

500

OS 41 = 0 - Mixed Units

E 147 ' 7.9/16" N 738 ' 2.1/4" EL +114 ' 9.5/16

1' 7

.11

4"N

/16

"

OS 41 = 1 - Imperial Units

ALIAS

E 44998 N 225000 EL +35000


10 0N

500

OS 41 = 2 - Metric Units

1 OF 4

Return to front sheet

- 245 -

ALIAS

BORE / DIMENSION / WEIGHT CONTROL

O.S. 41

E 44.998M N 225.500M EL +35.000M

4" N S

500

OS 41 Pos 2 = 1 Metric Co-Ordinates output in M.mmm format

OS 41 Pos 3 - Feet & Inch output format - including Stacked Fractions See the Options & AText Manual for details - no further example is needed here
ALIAS

Note that Stacked Fractions only apply to Imperial Dimensions and currently, only operate on MicroStation DGN drawings using a special font

2 OF 4

Return to front sheet

- 246 -

ALIAS

BORE / DIMENSION / WEIGHT CONTROL


OS 41 Pos 4 & 5 - Weight Information Output OS 41 Pos 4 = 1 Weights output in KGS format OS 41 Pos 5 = 1 Component Weights are listed as Total Weights

O.S. 41

Total Component Weights

OS 41 Pos 4 = 1 Weights output in KGS format OS 41 Pos 5 = 2 Component Weights are listed as Individual Weights
ALIAS

Individual Component Weights

Note that this Option Switch is used to control the output of basic component Weights. More extensive Weight functionality - including Pipe Full, Weights of Insulation, and C of G calculations - are controlled by OS 82 3 OF 4

Return to front sheet

- 247 -

ALIAS

BORE / DIMENSION / WEIGHT CONTROL


OS 41 Pos 6 & 7 - Imperial Dimensions Output Format

O.S. 41

OS 41 Pos 6 & 7 = 0 or Blank

OS 41 Pos 6 & 7 = 12

OS 41 Pos 8 - Bore Suppression at Tees / Olets and Reducers

ALIAS

OS 41 Pos 8 = 0 or Blank Bore information plotted

OS 41 Pos 8 = 1 Bore information not plotted 4 OF 4

Return to front sheet

- 248 -

ALIAS

Drawing viewpoint

DRAWING VIEWPOINT

O.S. 42

OS 42 = 0 (or 3)

OS 42 = 7

ALIAS

OS 42 = 1

OS 42 = 5 1 OF 2

Return to front sheet

- 249 -

ALIAS

DRAWING VIEWPOINT

O.S. 42

OS 42 = 2

OS 42 = 6

ALIAS

OS 42 = 4

OS 42 = 8 2 OF 2

Return to front sheet

- 250 -

ALIAS

Pipe wastage factor: areas 1 to 9

PIPE WASTAGE FACTOR - AREAS 1 TO 9

O.S. 43-51

The Isogen Pipe Wastage facility permits you (optionally) to allow extra tube material to be provided to allow for wastage during spool fabrication. When the facility is used, the Pipe length entries on the Material List are increased by a User defined amount. _______________________ There are two parts to the Pipe Wastage facility :_______________________ 1) The Basic Pipe Wastage Allowance is set by the User in the Piping Model on a Plant Area number basis. This value is expressed in terms of a percentage Wastage Factor - e.g. 10% and is extracted and held at pipe component level in the Piping Data File. Note that this basic Pipe Wastage Allowance actually operates independently of any settings in Option Switches 43 - 51. E.G. For a nominal tube length entry of 1000 mm which has a 10% Wastage Factor set in the Piping Model - the actual Material List entry would be 1000 + 10% = 1100 Note that if the Pipe Wastage Allowance is set in the Piping Data File to zero - then setting OS 43-51 will have no effect (because 0 X any value = 0) _______________________
ALIAS

2) Any such basic Pipe Wastage Factor set in the Piping Model may then be (optionally) overridden and increased (Note. never decreased) by the Isogen User through the use of Option Switches 43 to 51. E.G. For the example given in 1) above, if the pipe there was in Plant Area 2 and the Wastage Allowance needed to be increased to 20% - then Option Switch 44 would be set to 2. _______________________

Return to front sheet

- 251 -

ALIAS

Equipment trim drawings

EQUIPMENT TRIM DRAWINGS

O.S. 52

Equipment Trim isometrics are special types of drawings where Isogen produces a document having a BOM, an outline frame and a large empty area. In this example the materials connected to each nozzle are grouped up and listed separately - as shown below - this type of listing is produced by setting OS 52 Pos 1 = 0

ALIAS

The drawing part shown in green is produced in a 2D drawing system (like AutoCAD or MicroStation) and is then superimposed onto the empty area of the Isogen isometric to form a complete picture

Return to front sheet

- 252 -

ALIAS

Weld numbering

WELD NUMBERING

O.S. 53

OS 53 = 1 Small Size Weld Numbers

OS 53 = 2 Medium Size Weld Numbers


ALIAS

OS 53 = 3 Large Size Weld Numbers 1 OF 4

Return to front sheet

- 253 -

ALIAS

WELD NUMBERING

O.S. 53

OS 53 = 6 Fab Welds only numbered - Medium Size

ALIAS

OS 53 = 8 Erection Welds only numbered - Medium Size 2 OF 4

Return to front sheet

- 254 -

ALIAS

WELD NUMBERING

O.S. 53

This is a User Defined Weld Summary Box. It is generated by setting OS 53 Pos 2 = 1 and calling in a Weld Definition File (WDF). (For details of the WDF see the separate Welding slides). Note that there is another type of Weld Summary Box - one that does not require a WDF. However that type is not User Defined - it has a fixed content and layout. Although it is generated simply by setting OS 53 Pos 2 = 1 - it is no longer in common use.
ALIAS

3 OF 4

Return to front sheet

- 255 -

ALIAS

WELD NUMBERING

O.S. 53

For details of OS 53 Positions 3 & 4 - see the front sheets - no further explanation is needed here.

OS 53 Pos 5 Controls Weld Numbering Sequence. For example, if you want Fabrication Welds and Erection Welds to have their own Weld Numbering Sequence - set OS 53 Pos 5 = 1

SH2

SH1

ER1 SH3

SH4

ER2

ER3

ALIAS

Example where Fabrication and Erection Welds use the same Weld Numbering Sequence - OS 53 Pos 5 = blank

Example where Fabrication and Erection Welds use their own Weld Numbering Sequence - OS 53 Pos 5 = 1 Note that in this case individual enclosures and Weld Number Prefixes are recommended - as shown here. 4 OF 4

Return to front sheet

- 256 -

ALIAS

Weld plotting

WELD PLOTTING

O.S. 54

OS 54 = 1 - All Welds suppressed.

OS 54 = 2 - Only Site Welds plotted


ALIAS

OS 54 = 3 - Only Fab Welds plotted 1 OF 2

Return to front sheet

- 257 -

ALIAS

WELD PLOTTING

O.S. 54

OS 54 = 0

In this example all the materials are designated Erection - this causes all the Welds to automatically become Erection Welds as shown here

OS 54 = 4

ALIAS

Changing to OS 54 = 4 causes all the Erection Welds to be changed so they look like Fabrication Welds (Note that in doing this - the type of weld numbers generated are change also) 2 OF 2

Return to front sheet

- 258 -

ALIAS

Program messages: Run information

PROGRAM MESSAGES - RUN INFORMATION


OS 55 = 0
ISOGEN PC VERSION 7.7 THE FOLLOWING DRAWINGS ARE IN PLOTFILE D:\PSTDMIX\FULLISO\DXFOUT\FUL001.DXF DRG. 1 /6"-ASC-6900 PLOTTED

O.S. 55

OS 55 = 1
ISOGEN PC VERSION 7.7 **** ISODAT **** START OF DRAWING 6"-ASC-6900 OUTPUT STAGE OF DRAWING 6"-ASC-6900 **** ISOPLOT **** THE FOLLOWING DRAWINGS ARE IN PLOTFILE D:\PSTDMIX\FULLISO\DXFOUT\FUL002.DXF DRG. 1 /6"-ASC-6900 PLOTTED

OS 55 = 2
ISOGEN PC VERSION 7.7 ALIAS **** ISODAT **** START OF DRAWING 6"-ASC-6900 OUTPUT STAGE OF DRAWING 6"-ASC-6900 **** ISOPLOT **** DRG 1 SHAPED DRG 1 SIMULATE THE FOLLOWING DRAWINGS ARE IN PLOTFILE D:\PSTDMIX\FULLISO\DXFOUT\FUL003.DXF DRG. 1 /6"-ASC-6900 PLOTTED

Return to front sheet

- 259 -

ALIAS

Instrument identification

INSTRUMENT IDENTIFICATION

O.S. 59

OS 59 = 0 - Outputs the Instrument Name on the Material List.

OS 59 = 1 - Outputs the Instrument Item Code on the Material List.

ALIAS

OS 59 = 0 or 1

Note that this Option Switch only controls what parameter is output on the Material List / Material Control File - the Instrument's Name or the Instrument's Item Code. On the Drawing part - the Instrument's Name is always output regardless of the Option Switch setting.

Return to front sheet

- 260 -

ALIAS

Component tagging

COMPONENT TAGGING

O.S. 60

OS 60 = 0 No Component Tagging

OS 60 = 1 Component Tagging On and boxed in

ALIAS

OS 60 = 2 Component Tagging On but not boxed in

Return to front sheet

- 261 -

ALIAS

Insulation indication

INSULATION INDICATION

O.S. 61

OS 61 = 0 Insulation Indication On alongside Pipe only

OS 61 = 1 Insulation Indication Suppressed

ALIAS

OS 61 = 2 Insulation Indication On alongside Pipe & Components

Return to front sheet

- 262 -

ALIAS

Tracing indication

TRACING INDICATION

O.S. 62

OS 62 = 0 Tracing Indication On alongside Pipe only

OS 62 = 2 Tracing Indication On alongside Pipe & Components

ALIAS

OS 61 = 0 & OS 62 = 0 In this example - the Pipe is both Traced and Insulated

Return to front sheet

- 263 -

ALIAS

Printed output: Page length

PRINTED OUTPUT - PAGE LENGTH


XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

O.S. 63

55 Lines

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

PAGE 1

PAGE 2

OS 63 = 0

XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

66 Lines

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX ALIAS XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

PAGE 1

PAGE 2

OS 63 = 66

Return to front sheet

- 264 -

ALIAS

Pipe support identification

PIPE SUPPORT IDENTIFICATION

O.S. 64

OS 64 = 0 - No Support Name on the isometric - Item Code output on the Material List

OS 64 = 1 - Support Name on the isometric un-boxed Support Name output on the Material List
ALIAS

OS 64 = 2 - Support Name on the isometric boxed Item Code output on the Material List

Return to front sheet

- 265 -

ALIAS

Bolting units

BOLTING UNITS

O.S. 65

Bolts on the Isometric Material List and in the Material Control file may be reported in any combination of Diameter and Length Units. E.G. 5/8" Dia X 4" Long 5/8" Dia X 100 mm Long 16 mm Dia X 100 mm Long 16 mm Dia X 4" Long The purpose of this Option Switch to enable the Bolt Diameter and Length values held in the Piping Data file to be correctly interpreted by the Program.

This is because regardless of what Units are being employed - all Bolt Diameter and Length values are held in the Piping data File as integer type numbers Inch Units are held in 1/16" th's of an Inch Millimetres are held directly in mm's Hence 5/8" Diameter is held as 10 (ten sixteenths) 4" Long is held as 64 (64 sixteenths) 16 mm. Diameter is held as 16 100 mm. Long is held as 100
ALIAS

From this it can be seen that if this Option Switch is not set to correctly match the Bolt Unit values in the Piping Data file - the Bolting information reported by the Program will be incorrect !

Return to front sheet

- 266 -

ALIAS

Co-ordinates: Supplementary

CO-ORDINATES - SUPPLEMENTARY
66

O.S. 66

The Start End

This type of end co-ordinate shown in red - is controlled by O.S. 5 - not O.S. 66

The Supplementary elevations controlled by O.S. 66 Pos 1 are shown here in green

OS 66 = 0 This default setting causes only elevations that change to a new level to be ALIAS output - on arrowed out message lines. With this setting - even though N/S and E/W co-ordinates may also change - they are not output

This sketch shows the default co-ordinate information that is output 1 OF 5

Return to front sheet

- 267 -

ALIAS

CO-ORDINATES - SUPPLEMENTARY

O.S. 66

ALIAS

OS 66 = 1 Causes all Supplementary co-ordinates and elevations to be output along Witness Lines instead of on arrowed-out messages

2 OF 5

Return to front sheet

- 268 -

ALIAS

CO-ORDINATES - SUPPLEMENTARY

O.S 66

ALIAS

OS 66 = 221 Supplementary elevations and co-ordinates output at Bend, Elbow, and Branch Intersection positions - in all those cases where the elevation level or N/S or E/W co-ordinates have changed.

3 OF 5

Return to front sheet

- 269 -

ALIAS

CO-ORDINATES - SUPPLEMENTARY

O.S. 66

ALIAS

OS 66 = 330 (or 331) A Full set of all three co-ordinates are output

4 OF 5

Return to front sheet

- 270 -

ALIAS

CO-ORDINATES - SUPPLEMENTARY
Co-ordinates output at Isometric Split Points

O.S. 66

1) OS 66 Pos 4 = Blank - Split Point co-ordinates not output

ALIAS

2) OS 66 Pos 4 = 1 - Split Point co-ordinates output 5 OF 5

Return to front sheet

- 271 -

ALIAS

Sloping pipeline: 3D skew depiction

SLOPING PIPELINE - 3D SKEW DEPICTION -

O.S. 67

105

OS 67 = 0 - 3D Box depiction

ALIAS

OS 67 = 1 - 2D Triangle + Falls Indicator

Return to front sheet

- 272 -

ALIAS

Sloping pipeline: Vertical branches

SLOPING PIPELINE - VERTICAL BRANCHES

O.S. 68

OS 68 = 0 - Default to show the Short Tee branch leg skewed

ALIAS

OS 68 = 1 - To show the Short Tee branch leg straight

Return to front sheet

- 273 -

ALIAS

Terminal type identification

TERMINAL TYPE IDENTIFICATION

O.S. 69

This Option Switch is used if you want to see your isometrics directly on the screen rather than sent to a file and then plotted.

Note. You cannot send isometrics directly to the screen if you are using the PC Version of Isogen or Spoolgen ! With that version all isometric output must first be output to a file.
ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 274 -

ALIAS

Skew identification: Branches

SKEW INDICATION - BRANCHES

O.S. 70

OS 70 = 0 - Normal Skew Box / Triangle depiction

ALIAS

OS 70 = Value - Skew Box / Triangle suppressed (Here the value 4 was set)

Return to front sheet

- 275 -

ALIAS

Material part number: Enclosure style

MATERIAL PART NUMBER - ENCLOSURE STYLE

O.S. 73

OS 73 = 0 Standard Part Number Box - No special Blank Style Enclosure Box


5 5 5

2 Note that the end type of a Style 1 Blank box is controlled by OS 73 Pos 5

STYLE 1 BLANK ENCLOSURE BOXES

The Blank boxes are for manually added information

OS 73 = 12 Square Ended Style 1 Blank Enclosure Box with 12 blank character spaces 1 OF 2

Return to front sheet

- 276 -

ALIAS

MATERIAL PART NUMBER - ENCLOSURE STYLE

O.S. 73

5 0 Note that the end type of a Style 2 box is controlled by Option Switch 76

5 1

5 2

STYLE 2 ENCLOSURE BOXES

OS 73 = 1200 & OS 76 = 1 Diamond Ended Style 2 Enclosure Box with 12 blank character spaces

The STYLE 3 ENCLOSURE BOX style is a special one - It was introduced for one ISOGEN client only and it incorporates their particular requirements. For this reason it is not shown here. 2 OF 2

Return to front sheet

- 277 -

ALIAS

Material list: Accumulation control

MATERIAL LIST ACCUMULATION CONTROL

O.S. 74

OS 74 = 0 Default - whereby Fab Erection & Offshore materials are all accumulated normally

ALIAS

OS 74 = 3 Non-accumulation for Fab materials - including Pipe

Note. Non-Accumulation means that each occurrence of an item results in a quantity of 1 OFF being listed - and for Pipe each individual length is listed separately 1 OF 2

Return to front sheet

- 278 -

ALIAS

MATERIAL LIST ACCUMULATION CONTROL

O.S. 74

OS 74 = 13 Non-accumulation for Erect materials - Note that with this setting Gaskets and Bolts are still accumulated normally

ALIAS

OS 74 = 11113 Non-accumulation for all Erect materials - With this setting Gaskets and Bolts are also Non-accumulated. (Note that the Bolts are in sets)

2 OF 2

Return to front sheet

- 279 -

ALIAS

Weld number: Enclosure and prefix

WELD NUMBER - ENCLOSURE WELD NUMBER - PREFIX

O.S. 75

In this example :w2 different Weld Number Enclosure types are demonstrated wFab and Erect Welds use their own Weld Numbering sequence wWeld Number Prefixes are not shown

Round Ended enclosure for Erect Welds OS 75 = 2 0 1

Diamond Ended enclosure for Fab Welds

1 OF 2

Return to front sheet

- 280 -

ALIAS

WELD NUMBER - ENCLOSURE WELD NUMBER - PREFIX

O.S. 75

This is the same as the previous example except that Weld Number Prefixes are also shown here SH for Fab ER for Erect
Erect Weld Prefix ON Fab Weld Prefix ON

OS 75 = 1 2 1 1

OS 75 simply switches on the Weld Number Prefix facility - it does not define the actual Prefix character(s)
ALIAS

In the ISOGEN / SPOOLGEN systems the Prefix characters are defined using -130 -131 -132 and -133 records In the IDFGEN system the Prefix characters are defined using the following Pipe Header attributes:WELD-PREFIX-GENERAL WELD-PREFIX-ERECTION WELD-PREFIX-FABRICATION WELD-PREFIX-OFFSHORE 2 OF 2

Return to front sheet

- 281 -

ALIAS

Material part number enclosure shape

MATERIAL PART NUMBER ENCLOSURE SHAPE

O.S. 76

Flange Gasket Bolt enclosure F3 G5 B6 F3 G5 B6 F3 G5 B6 F3 G5 B6

Standard enclosure 2 2 2 2

Enclosure End Shape Rectangular Diamond Round No Enclosure No Part Number No Enclosure

OS 76 0 1 2 7 8

ALIAS

OS 76 = 0 Default Rectangular Ends 1 OF 3

Return to front sheet

- 282 -

ALIAS

MATERIAL PART NUMBER ENCLOSURE SHAPE

O.S. 76

OS 76 = 1 Diamond Ends

ALIAS

OS 76 = 2 Round Ends 2 OF 3

Return to front sheet

- 283 -

ALIAS

MATERIAL PART NUMBER ENCLOSURE SHAPE

O.S. 76

OS 76 = 7 No Enclosure Boxes

ALIAS

OS 76 = 8 No Part Numbers nor Enclosure Boxes 3 OF 3

Return to front sheet

- 284 -

ALIAS

Weld number allocation at slip-on flanges and reinforcement pads

WELD NUMBER ALLOCATION AT SLIP-ON FLANGES & REINFORCEMENT PADS

O.S. 77

OS 77 = 0 or 2 For two Weld Numbers

OS 77 = 1 For one Weld Number

OS 77 Pos 1 - Controls the quantity of Weld Numbers generated at Slip-On Flanges

ALIAS

OS 77 Pos 2 = 0 or Blank For No extra Weld Numbers

OS 77 Pos 2 - Controls the quantity of Weld Numbers generated at Reinforcement Pads 1 OF 2

Return to front sheet

- 285 -

ALIAS

WELD NUMBER ALLOCATION AT SLIP-ON FLANGES & REINFORCEMENT PADS

O.S. 77

OS 77 = 1 1 1 For 1 extra Pad Weld Number and the generation of a plotted Pad shape and Material List entry

OS 77 Pos 3 - Enables the automatic generation of a plotted shape for the Reinforcement Pad together with an Item Code and Description entry on the Material List

ALIAS

OS 77 = 1 2 1 For 2 extra Pad Weld Numbers

2 OF 2

Return to front sheet

- 286 -

ALIAS

Dimensions: To valve centres

DIMENSIONS - TO VALVE CENTRES

O.S. 80

OS 80 = 0 Default for ordinary Dimensioning - to the Valve Ends

OS 80 = 1000 For Dimensioning to the Valve Centre on Socket Weld Valves and Instruments
ALIAS

Notes. 1) This example is for a Socket Weld Valve. The Dimensioning method for this is controlled by OS 80 Pos 4 2) Further control for this function - by bore - is in OS 81 Pos 1

Return to front sheet

- 287 -

ALIAS

Dimensions: Branches

DIMENSIONS - BRANCHES

O.S. 81

Positions 1-3 of this Option Switch are not for Branches at all. This part is actually an extension of OS 80 - whereby Dimensioning to the Centres of Valve and Instruments may also be done by bore range. (OS 80 controls Dimensioning to the Centres of Valve and Instruments by end type)

OS 81 Pos 1-3 = 24 (& OS 80 Pos 4 =1) - Gives Dimensions to Valve / Instrument Centreline for all bores up to and including 1.1/2"

ALIAS

OS 81 Pos 1-3 = 24 (& OS 80 Pos 4 =1) - Gives Dimensions to Valve Ends for 2" bore

1 OF 2

Return to front sheet

- 288 -

ALIAS

DIMENSIONS - BRANCHES

O.S. 81

Branch Dimensioning functions are controlled by Positions 4, 5 & 6 and by Positions 7 & 8

OS 81 Pos 4 - 6 = Blank OS 81 Pos 7 & 8 = Blank - Gives full Branch Dimensioning regardless of the Branch Bore and the Number of components in the Branch

OS 81 = 48 000 - Suppresses Branch Dimensioning on Branch Bores 3" and less - regardless of the number of components in the Branch

ALIAS

OS 81 = 2 048 000 - Puts Branch Dimensioning back on again - because the Branch has more than 2 components

2 OF 2

Return to front sheet

- 289 -

ALIAS

C of G/weight output

C of G / WEIGHT OUTPUT

O.S. 82

Option Switch 82 provides further Weight functionality to that in OS 41 Pos 4 & 5 which is for basic Component Weights only OS 82 adds controls for :w Full (Wet) Pipeline Weight w Weight Of Insulation w Centre of Gravity of Pipeline - Empty or Full - with or without Insulation

OS 82 Pos 1 switches On the C of G / Weights facility - and controls whether the output values are per Pipeline or per Drawing

OS 82 Pos 1 2 & 3 = 1 1 1 - For Weight outputs Dry Weight (Pipeline Empty) Wet Weight (Pipeline Full) Insulation Weight
ALIAS

Notes 1) These Weights are per Drawing and are output in this style on the Drawing Frame using the ISOGEN TextPos facility 2) The Pipe Empty Weight is derived solely from the Weight of components 1 OF 2

Return to front sheet

- 290 -

ALIAS

C of G / WEIGHT OUTPUT

O.S. 82

OS 82 Pos 4 & 5 = 2 3 - For Centre of Gravity Outputs Dry (Empty) C of G and Dry (Empty) + Insulation C of G position Wet (Full) Pipe + Insulation C of G position

ALIAS

2 OF 2

Return to front sheet

- 291 -

ALIAS

DXF file units

DXF FILE UNITS

O.S. 92

1 Drawing Underlay

2 Detail Sketches

DETAIL -

DETAIL -

DETAIL -

Where used - the Drawing Underlay (1) and Detail Sketches (2) must be consistent in respect of the Units they are constructed with. The resultant Output Drawing (3) will be generated by ISOGEN in the same Units.

SEE DETAIL A
DETAIL - A

3 Isometric Output Drawings

Return to front sheet

- 292 -

ALIAS

Component leg length

COMPONENT LEG LENGTH

O.S. 95

OS 95 = 0 Default for Leg Length of 9 mm

ALIAS

OS 95 = 12 Showing increased Leg Lengths of 12 mm

Return to front sheet

- 293 -

ALIAS

Skew depiction: Individual/overall

SKEW DEPICTION - INDIVIDUAL / OVERALL

O.S. 97

OS 97 = 0 Default for Single Overall Box / Triangle enclosure around the Skew section (This example shows a Triangle)

ALIAS

OS 97 = 1 For individual Box / Triangle Skew enclosures around each Branch section

Return to front sheet

- 294 -

ALIAS

Skew depiction: Style

SKEW DEPICTION - STYLE

O.S. 99

OS 99 = 0 Default for Skew Box depiction with normal dimensioning style

OS 99 = 1 Skew Triangle depiction with normal dimensioning style


ALIAS

OS 99 = 3 Skew Triangle depiction with alternative dimensioning style 1 OF 2

Return to front sheet

- 295 -

ALIAS

SKEW DEPICTION - STYLE

O.S. 99

3D Skew Sections - will normally follow the value in Pos 1 that are set for 2D skews - unless the value 1 is set in Pos 2

In this 3D Skew example OS 99 Pos 2 is not set (it is left blank) - So the skew type follows what is set in Pos 1 - in this case value 3 which gives Triangle depiction with alternative dimensioning style as in the last example on the previous page

ALIAS

Changing OS 99 Pos 2 = 1 causes 3D skews to be shown in the Box style - like this example here 2 OF 2

Return to front sheet

- 296 -

ALIAS

Skew depiction: Dimension line standout

SKEW DEPICTION - DIMENSION LINE STANDOUT

O.S. 100

This Option Switch is used to move the Triangle Dimension further out

ALIAS

OS 100 = 0 Default for standard dimension distance - plotted alongside the triangle line

OS 100 = 120 Gives an increased standout distance of 12 mm

Return to front sheet

- 297 -

ALIAS

Skew depiction: Triangle hatching

SKEW DEPICTION - TRIANGLE HATCHING

O.S. 101

This Option Switch enables Skew Triangles to be optionally filled in with Hatching Lines The controls here allow you to :w w

Vary the distance between the Hatch Lines Have Full or Partial Hatching - Partial Hatching is where only part of the triangle area is Hatched With Partial Hatching - vary the amount of the Hatching

OS 101 = 1 Default for Triangle Hatching On This gives Full Hatching with a Hatch Line pitch of 1 mm

ALIAS

OS 101 = 40 This gives Full Hatching with an increased Hatch Line pitch of 4 mm 1 OF 2

Return to front sheet

- 298 -

ALIAS

SKEW DEPICTION - TRIANGLE HATCHING

O.S. 101

OS 101 = 3540 This gives Partial Hatching with an Hatch Line pitch of 4 mm and a maximum Hatch Line Length of 35 mm

When setting Pos 3 & 4 to define a Hatch Line Cut-Off value like that above - this is the length that is defined - in the above example this is 35 mm 2 OF 2

Return to front sheet

- 299 -

ALIAS

Skew depiction: matching clearance

SKEW DEPICTION - HATCHING CLEARANCE

O.S. 102

This Option Switch controls the size of the Clearance Gaps that occur in and around Hatching There are three of these such gaps :w w w

Local to the Pipeline Local to In-Line Components Around Dimensions and Text that appear in the Hatching region

Local toComponents Local to Pipeline

OS 102 = 0 Default Gaps at all three positions

Around Dimensions and Text

ALIAS

OS 102 = 404040 Gaps increased to 4 mm at all three positions

Return to front sheet

- 300 -

ALIAS

Pipeline splitting: In tube

PIPELINE SPLITTING - IN TUBE

O.S. 108

SITUATION

ISOGEN wants to split the pipeline into 2 drawings in tube - at this point

DRAWING 1

DRAWING 2

ALIAS

This Option Switch controls what action the Program must take when presented with the above situation For the three possible actions - see the Options & Atext manual

Return to front sheet

- 301 -

ALIAS

Repeatability file content

REPEATABILITY FILE CONTENT

O.S. 109

When it is required to pass ISOGEN generated information back to your 3D Design System - then the REPEATABILITY (or RETURN) File System is used Not all 3D Systems can use it however ! Some don't have the capability For details of what information may be passed back in this way - see the list in the Options & AText Manual Note. This Option Switch also contains a non-Repeatability function Position 6 controls the action of component Re-ordering in By-Passes This Re-ordering function is done by default - OS 109 Pos 6 = 0 or blank -

Explanation :- In a by-pass like this - to enable correct


spools to be generated - ISOGEN needs to have the closure point at either of these two positions However, the IDF extraction program of some 3D Design systems sets the closure point here

ALIAS

or here

By default - OS 109 Pos 6 = 0 or blank - which causes ISOGEN to always set the by-pass closure point at the preferred position. If this proves to give problems - you must unset this action by setting Pos 6 = 1

Return to front sheet

- 302 -

ALIAS

Ghost gaps

GHOST GAPS

O.S. 110

Ghost Gaps are created in the 3D Design System and are used to link related, but unconnected components - for example :w w

One Pipeline to another - to form a System Isometric One part of a Pipeline to another part of the same Pipeline where a middle section may have a 'hold' on it - thus remaining incomplete and not finished

Note. Gaps may be dimensioned or un-dimensioned but this feature is not controlled by this Option Switch - it is controlled from within the 3D Design System whereby appropriate settings are made in the extracted Piping Data File (This example shows an undimensioned Gap)

OS 110 = 0 Gives the standard size Gap - like this

ALIAS

These examples shows part of a System isometric - consisting of 2 Pipelines

OS 110 = 50 Increases the Gap size so it looks like this

Return to front sheet

- 303 -

ALIAS

Nozzles

NOZZLES

O.S. 111

OS 111 = 0 Default - Nozzles Not plotted

OS 111 = 1 Nozzles plotted


ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 304 -

ALIAS

Flow arrows: Pipeline

FLOW ARROWS - PIPELINE

O.S. 112

OS 112 = 5

ALIAS

OS 112 = 0 or 8

OS 112 = 15

Return to front sheet

- 305 -

ALIAS

Spec break indication

SPEC BREAK INDICATION

O.S. 114

OS 114 = 0 Default for the old style single Spec Break indication box

Note Although it is shown here - this style is now redundant and should not be used As you can see - its not clear which side of the division line the new spec is referring to

OS 114 = 1 Two box indication

ALIAS

This is the recommend method this style is more informative - it clearly indicates the spec for both sides of the division line

Return to front sheet

- 306 -

ALIAS

Tolerance: Offset angle

TOLERANCE - OFFSET ANGLE

O.S. 115

This Option Switch enables you to prevent the generation of unwanted Skews. The Piping Data File extraction programs of some 3D Design Systems can contain small dimension inaccuracies leading to small movements at some pipe ends These small movements are then detected by ISOGEN which then generates a Skew section
3

Case 1 - OS 115 = 0

3 mm movement in N/S plane - gives a skew angle of 0.08

Case 2 - OS 115 = 25 This demonstrates that setting a .25 degree cutoff value causes the unwanted skew not to be generated
ALIAS

Note Option Switch OS 116 also controls unwanted skew generation - but using a dimensional tolerance However - either OS 115 or OS 116 must be set ! not both Of the two Option Switches - OS 116 is the preferred one for you to set - but OS 115 takes precedence if both are set

Return to front sheet

- 307 -

ALIAS

Tolerance: Dimension offset

TOLERANCE - DIMENSION OFFSET

O.S. 116

Like OS 115 - this Option Switch also enables the prevention of unwanted Skews - but by means of a Dimension Tolerance rather than an Angle Tolerance

Case 1 - OS 116 = 0

1 mm movement in N/S plane - causes a skew to be generated

Case 2 - OS 116 = 250 This demonstrates that setting a 2 mm cut-off value causes the unwanted skew not to be generated
ALIAS

Note Option Switch OS 115 also controls unwanted skew generation - but using an angular tolerance However - either OS 116 or OS 115 must be set ! not both Of the two Option Switches - OS 116 is the preferred one for you to set - but OS 115 takes precedence if both are set

Return to front sheet

- 308 -

ALIAS

Dimensions: Overall

DIMENSIONS - OVERALL

O.S. 118

OS 118 = 1 Overall Dimensions On Going across Branches

OS 118 = 2 Overall Dimensions On Stopping at Branches

ALIAS

OS 118 = 3 Overall Dimensions On Going to Valve Centres and going across Branches

1 OF 2

Return to front sheet

- 309 -

ALIAS

DIMENSIONS - OVERALL

O.S. 118

OS 118 = 4 Overall Dimensions On Going to Valve Centres but stopping at Branches

OS 118 = 344 The value 34 in Pos 2 & 3 causes the Standout distance for the Overall Dimensions to be moved out from the Note that doing this causes standard distance to 34 mm the standard dimension layer to move to the inner position
ALIAS

OS 118 = 344 with OS 8 = 16 This is to demonstrate that if you put a value in OS 118 Pos 2 & 3 - you must put a value in OS 8 to control the normal dimension standout distance and keep it in the standard position also

2 OF 2

Return to front sheet

- 310 -

ALIAS

Dimensions/elevation: Vertical

DIMENSIONS / ELEVATION - VERTICAL

O.S. 119

OS 119 = 0 Default for Normal Vertical pipe Dimensions & Elevations plotted at intersection points when the level changes

ALIAS

OS 119 = 1 All Vertical Dimensions suppressed and replaced by Elevation Messages 1 OF 2

Return to front sheet

- 311 -

ALIAS

DIMENSIONS / ELEVATION - VERTICAL

O.S. 119

OS 119 = 2 For Vertical Dimensions and Elevations output at all normal dimensioning positions

ALIAS

2 OF 2

Return to front sheet

- 312 -

ALIAS

Tapping: Branch scale/branch dimensions/branch co-ordinates

TAPPING - BRANCH SCALE TAPPING - BRANCH DIMENSIONS TAPPING - BRANCH CO-ORDINATES

O.S. 120 O.S. 121 O.S. 122

OS 120 = 0 - Full size Branch OS 121 = 0 - Branch Dimension On OS 122 = 0 - No Tapping Point Co-ords

ALIAS

OS 120 = 60 - Reduced Branch Scaling OS 121 = 1 - Branch Dimensions OFF OS 122 = 1 - Tapping Point Co-ords plotted

Return to front sheet

- 313 -

ALIAS

Instrument ID enclosure

INSTRUMENT ID ENCLOSURE

O.S. 123

OS 123 = 0 Default for No Balloon around Instrument Name

OS 123 = 5 For the Instrument Name to be plotted inside a 5 character size Balloon
ALIAS

OS 123 = 4 This Instrument Name has a $ character in it to make the name be plotted over 2 lines here, it is inside a 4 character size Balloon 1 OF 2

Return to front sheet

- 314 -

ALIAS

INSTRUMENT ID ENCLOSURE

O.S. 123

OS 123 Pos 3 - Controls alternative Enclosure Box Shapes 1 gives 2 3 4 5 CV200 CV200 C1 C1 CV200

OS 123 = 100 For Diamond Ended Box enclosure around Instrument Name
ALIAS

Note that with these enclosure styles the Instrument Name must be on one line - that is, the $ feature cannot be used in the name

2 OF 2

Return to front sheet

- 315 -

ALIAS

Flange/rotation angles

FLANGE ROTATION ANGLES

O.S. 124

OS 124 = 0 Default for Flange Rotation Angles Not indicated

OS 124 = 1 Flange Rotation Angle indicated


ALIAS

Other Box Shapes OS124 Pos 2 OS 124 = 11 Flange Rotation Angle indicated - in a Diamond Ended box 2 = FLANGE ROTATION 45.0 3 = FLANGE ROTATION 45.0

Return to front sheet

- 316 -

ALIAS

Isogen version/run date

ISOGEN VERSION / RUN DATE

O.S. 127

OS 127 = 0 Default for Banner Not to be plotted

OS 127 = 1 For Banner to be plotted

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 317 -

ALIAS

Fab friendly isometrics

FAB FRIENDLY ISOMETRICS (FFI)

O.S. 128

The FAB FRIENDLY ISOMETRICS System was introduced for a particular ALIAS client The System uses SPOOLGEN type on-screen probing methods to break down and re-assemble parts of long pipelines into required isometric combinations The System uses the clients particular (that is, non-general) working practices

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 318 -

ALIAS

Interactive editing

INTERACTIVE EDITING

O.S. 129

Set this Option Switch to value 1 to obtain the SPOOLGEN Interactive Editing System (also called Probing) As stated in the OPTIONS & ATEXT MANUAL - this feature only operates on PC based computers under MS Windows 3.XX or Windows NT

ALIAS

Return to front sheet

- 319 -

ALIAS

Versions

ISSUE 1.0 2.0

DATE 1 Mar 95 1 Jul 96

MODIFICATIONS First Release O.S. 2 O.S. 4 O.S. 8 O.S. 9 O.S. 21 O.S. 23 O.S. 24 O.S. 27 O.S. 39 O.S. 40 O.S. 41 O.S. 53 O.S. 54 O.S. 71 O.S. 73 New Switch Positions 3 & 4 added. Switch Values 3, 4 & 5 added. Revised in-line with changes added to O.S. 4. Description of settings for Switch Position 1 rewritten. New Switch Position 3 added. New Switch Position 2 Value 2 and Switch Position 3 Value 4 added. New Switch Position 2 Value 2 added. Switch Values 3, 4 & 5 added. New Switch Position 1 Value 2 added. New Switch Value 3 added. Switch Position 3 now brought into use. New Switch Positions 6, 7 & 8 added. New Switch Position 5 added. Related Option Switch 77 added. Note added to Switch Position 4 Value 4. Switch Title & Description revised due to introduction of O.S. 76. Note added to Switch Positions 3 & 4. Switch Position 1 Value 3 added. New Switch Value 7 added. Related Option Switch 77 added. New Option Switch. New Option Switch. Switch Position 6 now brought into use. New Switch Position 2 added.

ISOGEN Version Number V 7.2

V7.3 to V 7.7

O.S. 74 O.S. 75 O.S. 76 O.S. 77 O.S. 109 O.S. 111

Switches by number Switches by name

ALIAS
- 320 -

ISSUE

DATE

MODIFICATIONS O.S. 128 O.S. 7 O.S. 64 New Option Switch. New Switch Position 3 added. New Switch Values 3 & 4 added. New Switch Position 5 added. New Switch Position 3 added. New Switch Position 5 and 6 added. New Switch Position 5 added. New Values 7 & 8 added to Switch Positions 1 & 2. New Switch Position 4 added. New Value 2 added to Switch Positions 4 & 5. New Switch Positions 4 & 5 added. New Switch Position 3 added. New Switch values 8 & 9 added. New Switch Position 6 and 7 added. New Switch Postions 2 & 3 added. New Option Switch. New weight output added for Switch Position 4. New Switch Positions 5 and 6 added. New Option Switch New Switch Position 7 added New Switch Position 3 added Switches 2, 5 and 7 modified Option Switch Position 2,3 and 6 modified Option Switch Position 1 modified Option Switch Position 3 modified New Switch Position 8 added New Switch Position 4 added Option Switch Position 6 modified New Switch Position 6 added New Switch Position 2 added Option Switch Position 6 modified Option Switch Position 4 added Option Switch Position 6 modified Option Switch Position 4 and 7 modified Switch Position 1 modified Switch Position 3 modified, 8 and 9 added New Switch Positions 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 added Switch Positions 1/3 and 4/6 modified Switch Positions 1,3 and 5 modified New Switch Positions 7, 8 and 9 added

ISOGEN Version Number

3.0

1 Aug 98

O.S. 2 O.S. 26 O.S. 39 O.S. 40 O.S. 71 O.S. 77 O.S. 109 O.S. 120

V 7.8 to V 7.14.5

1 May 99

O.S. 6 O.S. 21 O.S. 53 O.S. 55 O.S. 78

V 7.16.0 V 7.16.0 V 7.16.0 V 7.16.0 V 7.16.0 V 7.17.7 V 8.3.0 V 8.4.0 V 8.5.1 V 8.5.0 V 8.5.4 V 8.5.4 V 8.5.4 V 8.6.0 V 8.6.0 V 8.6.0 V 8.7.0 v 8.7.0 V 8.7.0 V 8.7.2 V 8.8.0 V 8.8.0 V 8.8.1 V 8.10.0 V 8.10.0 V 8.10.0 V 8.10.0 V 8.10.0 V 8.10.0

31 Jan 00 21 July 00 2 Aug 00 22 Sept 00 15 Dec 00 15 Dec 00 15 Dec 00 15 Dec 00 9 Apr 01 9 Apr 01 9 Apr 01 9 Apr 01 9 Apr 01 9 Apr 01 3 Jul 01 3 Jul 01 3 Jul 01 27 Nov 01 17 May 02 17 May 02 17 May 02 17 May 02 17 May 02 17 May 02

O.S. 41 O.S. 66 O.S. 79 O.S. 39 O.S. 95 O.S. 9 O.S. 41 O.S. 109 O.S. 8 O.S. 9 O.S. 4 O.S. 9 O.S. 2 O.S. 31 O.S. 2 O.S. 8 O.S. 39 O.S. 71 O.S. 31 O.S. 39 O.S. 54 O.S. 71 O.S. 75 O.S. 75

Switches by number Switches by name

ALIAS
- 321 -

ISSUE

DATE 17 May 02 17 May 02 17 May 02 17 May 02 17 May 02 17 May 02 17 May 02 18 Nov 02 18 Nov 02 2 Apr 03 2 Apr 03 2 Apr 03 2 Apr 03 2 Apr 03 2 Apr 03 2 Apr 03 2 Apr 03 2 Apr 03 2 Apr 03 2 Apr 03 2 Apr 03

MODIFICATIONS O.S. 76 O.S. 76 O.S. 77 O.S. 78 O.S. 78 O.S. 79 O.S. 79 O.S. 2 O.S. 24 O.S. 2 O.S. 9 O.S. 19 O.S. 38 O.S. 39 O.S 41 O.S 53 O.S 65 O.S. 70 O.S. 95 O.S 99 O.S. 117 Switch Position 1 modified New Switch Positions 2 and 3 added New Switch Positions 5 and 7 added Switch Positions 1, 3 and 5 modified New Switch Positions 7, 8 and 9 added Switch Position 3 modified Switch Position 9 added Switch Position 5 modified Switch Position 2 modified Switch Position 7 and 8 added Switch Position 9 added Switch Position 2 added Switch Position 4 added Switch Position 5 modified Switch Position 9 added Switch Position 8 and 9 added Switch Position 3 added Switch Position 3 added Switch Position 4 and 5 added Switch Position 3 added Switch Position 1 modified

ISOGEN Version Number V 8.10.0 V 8.10.0 V 8.10.0 V 8.10.0 V 8.10.0 V 8.10.0 V 8.10.0 V 8.10.5 V 8.10.5 V.8.11.0 V.8.11.0 V.8.11.0 V.8.11.0 V.8.11.0 V.8.11.0 V.8.11.0 V.8.11.0 V.8.11.0 V.8.11.0 V.8.11.0 V.8.11.0

Switches by number Switches by name

ALIAS
- 322 -

Index
Click on an Option Switch name/page number to access switch information. Where more than one page number is shown, click on the separate page numbers to view different sheets relating to the named switch.

B
Bending file 9 Bolting units 86 Bore control 55

left 16 right 17 top 18 Drawing output file 41 picture scale 44 scaling 42 screen 41 stacking orientation 47 stacking value 46 Drawing size height 22 standard postscript plotter size 20 width 23 Drawing text size 5 Drawing trim marks 4 Drawing viewpoint 59 DXF file units 127

C
Centre of Gravity 116 Clear screen 79 Component leg length 130 Component tagging 81 Co-ordinates connection 7 connectivity 7 supplementary 87 Cut piece add-on allowance Cut piece list type 2 Cut piece numbering type 2

E
Elevations vertical 157 Equipment trim drawings 69

F
30
Fab friendly isometrics 167 Flange rotation angles 163 Flow arrows components 24 pipeline 149

D
170, 171, 172, 173, 174, 175, 176, 177, 179, 180 Dimension control 55 Dimension form 14 Dimension line standout 11
Dimensions branches 114 overall 155 round off 154 to valve centres 112 vertical 157 Drawing reserved areas 45 Drawing frame program standard 25 Drawing margin bottom 19 Date output 8 Detailed marker 43 Development testing

G
Ghost gaps 147

I
Instrument ID enclosure 161 Instrument identification 80 Insulation indication 82 Interactive editing 169 Isogen run date 166 version 166 Isometric type 28, 29

M
Material control

Switches by number

- 322 -

ALIAS

comdace file contents 125 comdace file controls 126 pipeline identification 150 Material list accumulation control 100 continuation method 39 controls 31 descriptions 35 file type 31 item code length 37 line spacing 38 pipeline length units 33 pipeline/drawing 33 position 34 text size 36 Material part number enclosure shape 104 enclosure style 98

R
Repeatability file content 145 Reserved 97, 131, 164, 165 Revision marker 43

S
Skew depiction dimension line standout 136 hatching clearance 138 individual 132 overall 132 style 134 triangle hatching 137 Skew indication branches 94 Sloping pipeline 3D skew depiction 90 vertical branches 91 Sloping pipeline indication limit 27 Sloping pipeline indication method 26 Spare switch 107, 110, 118, 119, 120, 121, 122,

N
Nozzles dotted 148

P
Pipe support identification Pipe supports 52 Pipe wastage factor area 1 60 area 2 61 area 3 62 area 4 63 area 5 64 area 6 65 area 7 66 area 8 67 area 9 68 Pipeline splitting automatic 48 in tube 144 user control 9 Plotfile ASCII text 178 DGN link 178 Plotfile format 95 Plotfile length 1 Printed output page length 84 Program messages isodat 77 isoplot 78 run information 75

85

123, 124, 128, 129, 133, 139, 140, 141, 142, 143 Specification break indication 151 Spool piece identifiers 49

T
Tapping branch co-ordinates 160 branch dimensions 159 branch scale 158 Terminal type identification 92 Title block position 34 Tolerance angle offset 152 dimension offset 153 Tracing indication 83

W
Weight control 55 Weight output 116 Weld number enclosure 102 prefix 102 Weld number allocation at slip-on flanges and reinforcement pads 105 Switches Weld numbering 71 by number

- 323 -

ALIAS

Weld plotting 74

Switches by number

- 324 -

ALIAS

How to navigate this file: Next/previous sheet (some switches run over more than one sheet)

Next/previous switch
Switches by number Switches by name Details

Brings up a table of contents ordered either by switch name, or by switch number. You can access any of the switch front sheets from here Accesses switch detail sheet (if available) Accesses switch front sheet

Return to front sheet

ALIAS

Accesses this page

About us:

Alias Limited is situated in the North-West of England. Our business is software, to design, document, fabricate and maintain piping systems.
Contact us: Alias Limited 1 Stuart Road Manor Park Runcorn Cheshire WA7 1TS England

Telephone: Fax: email:

(+44) (0) 1928 579311 (+44) (0) 1928 579389 info@alias.ltd.uk

Switches by number
- 325 -

Switches by name

AText Reference Guide

ALIAS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR TECHNICAL OR EDITORIAL ERRORS OR OMISSIONS CONTAINED HEREIN NOR FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE FURNISHING, PERFORMANCE OR USE OF THIS MATERIAL. It is the policy of Alias Limited to enforce any and all rights relating to protection of this information. The information contained in this manual is proprietary in nature and may not be reproduced, copied or divulged in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Alias Limited. This manual has been provided pursuant to the terms of a contract or confidentiality agreement. Unauthorised distribution or disclosure of its contents is a violation of that contract or agreement and persons doing so may be liable for penalties as provided by law. Copyright 1991-2004 Alias Limited. All Rights Reserved. Alias Limited, 1 Stuart Road, Manor Park Runcorn, Cheshire WA7 1TS United Kingdom Telephone: Fax: Email:

+44 (0) 1928 579311 +44 (0) 1928 579389 info@alias.ltd.uk

I-Sketch, I-Sketch Classic, I-Sketch Field, I-Sketch, I-Convert, I-Export, I-Run, I-View, I-View CAD, I-Tools, I-Serve, I-Data Integrator, I-Data Estimator, PLS Router, SPOOLGEN and ISOGEN are registered trademarks of Alias Limited. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

ALIAS

AText Reference Guide

The Isometric Drawing Area

AText listed by category and number order:


Click on an AText to access its information.

The Isometric Drawing Area -201 -202 -203 -204 -205 -206 -207 -208 -209 -210 -211 -212 -213 -214 -215 -216 -217 -218 -219 -220 -221 -222 -223 -224 -225 -226 -227 -228 -229 -230 -231 -232 -233 -236 -237 -238
- - E - - N - -W - - S EL + EL - - - - - - - - -?NS - - - - - - CONN. TO - - - - - - CONT. ON - - - - - - - - - - - F - - - - - - - - - - - G - - - - - - - - - - - B - - - - - - - SPINDLE - - - - - - - - - - MM - REDUCING FLANGE - - - - - - - OFFSET - - - - - - - - MITRE - - - - - - -LOBSTER - - - - REINFORCED - - - - - LEFT LOOSE - - - - - - - - - FFW - - - - - - - - - FALL -

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -:

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)
- - - - - -GRAD - - - - - PER M - - - - PER FT SCREWED END - - - - - - VENT - - - - - - BEND - - - - - - SPEC - - - - - - - - C - - - - - - - - S - - - - - - - - " - - - - - - - - -'

ALIAS

The Isometric Drawing Area

-239 -240 -241 -242 -243 -244 -245 -246 -247 -248 -249 -275 -276 -277 -278 -279 -280 -281 -282 -283 -284 -285 -286 -287 -288 -298 -337 -338 -346 -349 -350 -356 -357 -358 -362 -388 -389 -390 -391 -392 -394 -425 -433 -434 -437 -450 -451

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - DRAIN

-(Normally blank) -(Normally blank) -(Normally blank) -(Normally blank)

- - - - - - - - - UP - - - - - - - DOWN - - - - - - - NORTH - - - - - - - SOUTH - - - - - - - - EAST - - - - - - - - WEST - - - - SWEPT TEE - - - - CONT. FROM - ORIFICE FLANGE - - - - - DIAL FACE - - - - - - - - - - L - - - - - - TAPPING - - - - - - - - TAIL - - - - - - WINDOW - - - - - - - - FLAT - - - - - TEE BEND - - RATING FLANGE

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)
- - ORIENTATION DIRECTION - - - - - - - - - - - - - PIPE - - - - - - - - - TEE ELBOW - - - - - - - D BEND RADIUS - - - - - - - - BEND RADIUS - - GEARBOX ORIENTATION - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PP - - - - - REDUCING ELBOW - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - U - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -W - - - - - - - - - - END$ONE - TANGENTIAL CONNECTION - - - -OFFSET CONNECTION - - - - - - - FROM ? ORIGIN

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - (Normally Blank)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - MULTIPLE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TOT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SEAL WELD

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - STUB IN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)


- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -B.O.P. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TAPPING CONNECTION

ALIAS

Specification Change Indication

-452 -454 -455 -456 -457 -458 -459 -469 -470 -477 -460 -461 -462 -463 -464 -465 -466 -467 -468 -471 -475 -476 -498 -499 -501 -502 -512 -533 -534 -535 -536 -539 -541 -542 -543 -544 -545 -885

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - CONNECTION ORIENTATION

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SEE DETAIL ? - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - MITRE ?

- - - (Normally Blank) - - - - - - - - - ?THK - REFERENCE POINT SUPPORT LOCATION - - - - - - CUT OUT ?


- - - - - - BEAM$? - - - - - COLUMN$? - - ?$BUILDING CL - CL EQUIPMENT$? - - - CL PIPELINE$? - - ?$FLOOR LEVEL - - - - - - ?$WALL - - - - GRID LINE$? - - - - - - - - - - ? -LOCATION-POINT?

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)


- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SHOP TEST WELD

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)
- SUPPORT TACK WELD - - - - - - FI - - - - - RL - - - - - SU - - - - - VL - - - - - - -. - - - - - _N - - - - - -_S

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)


- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -/

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Delimiter

Specification Change Indication -289 -290 -291 -292 -293


- MATL -INSUL TRACE -PAINT

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)

ALIAS

The Title Block/Drawing Frame Areas

-294 -295 -296 -297

-(Normally blank) -(Normally blank) -(Normally blank) -(Normally blank)

The Title Block/Drawing Frame Areas -250 -251 -252 -253 -254 -255 -256 -257 -258 -259 -260 -261 -262 -263 -264 -265 -266 -267 -268 -269 -270 -271 -272 -436
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - DATE - - - - - - - - - PROJECT NO. - - - - - - - - - - BATCH REF - - - - - - - - - - PIPING SPEC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ISS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - DRG - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OF - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SPL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - JAN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FEB - - - - - - - - - - - - - - MAR - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -APR - - - - - - - - - - - - - - MAY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - JUN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - JUL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUG - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SEP - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -OCT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - NOV - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -DEC - THERMAL INSULATION SPEC - - - - - - - - TRACING SPEC - - - - - - - - PAINTING SPEC - - - - - - - - - JACKET SPEC

The Plotted Material And Cut Pipe List Heading Texts -274 -300 -301 -302 -303 -304 -305 -306 -307 -308 -309 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)
- FABRICATION MATERIALS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - NO -COMPONENT DESCRIPTION - - - - - - - - - - - - - - N.S. - - - - - - - - - - ITEM CODE - - - - - - - - - - - - - -QTY - - - - - - - - - - - - - PIPE - - - - - - - - - - - FITTINGS - - - - - - - - - - -FLANGES

ALIAS

The Plotted Material And Cut Pipe List Heading Texts

-310 -311 -312 -313 -314 -315 -316 -319 -320 -321 -322 -323 -324 -325 -326 -327 -328 -329 -330 -331 -334 -335 -339 -340 -341 -342 -343 -344 -345 -347 -348 -351 -352 -353 -354 -355 -356 -357 -358 -359 -362 -363 -364 -365 -366 -367 -368

- ERECTION MATERIALS - - - - - - - - GASKETS - - - - - - - - - - BOLTS - VALVES / IN-LINE ITEMS - - - - - - INSTRUMENTS - - - - - - - - SUPPORTS - - - - - - PIPE SPOOLS - - - - CUT PIPE LENGTH - - - - - - - - - - -PIECE - - - - - - - - - - - - NO - - - - - - - - - - - -CUT - - - - - - - - - LENGTH - - - - - - - - REMARKS

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PLD BEND - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - LOOSE FLG - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FF WELD - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -M - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - INS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - MM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S WITH SPECIAL RATING FLANGE(S) (SEE ISO) - - - - - - - MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - INDUCTION BEND ID - - - - - - - - EQUIPMENT TRIM MATERIALS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - NOZZLE REF - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - CONTINUED - - - - - - - - - - - - - - END CONNECTORS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AND

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)


-FABRICATED (PULLED) BEND - - - - - - - - - - - - WEIGHT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - KGS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - LBS - - -TOTAL WEIGHT-THIS DRG - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - U - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -W

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - END$ONE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - END$TWO - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ITEM$CODE

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SQ.CUT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - BEVEL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SCREWED

ALIAS

The Line Summary Area

-369 -370 -371 -372 -373 -374 -375 -376 -377 -378 -379 -380 -381 -382 -383 -384 -385 -426 -427 -428 -431 -472 -473 -474 -500 -503 -514 -515 -537 -538 -540

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - SHAPED - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -MITRED - - - - - - OFFSHORE MATERIALS - - - - - - - - - - - - - REMARKS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - REM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ANGLE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - WELDS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -FAB - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - EREC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OFF - - TOTAL FABRICATION WEIGHT - - - - TOTAL ERECTION WEIGHT - - - - TOTAL OFFSHORE WEIGHT - TOTAL WEIGHT UNLISTED ITEMS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - * - - - - - - - - - - - - - TANGENT+ - - - - - - - - - - - - - CUT/WELD - - - - - - - - - - - - - GROOVED - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FLARED - - - - - - - - - - - - - SCREWED - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SOCKET - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - No.? - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OF - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ABOVE - - - - - - - - - - - - -SHOP TEST - - - - - - - - - - - - - -SPOOL ID - - - - - - - - - - - - - REINFPAD - - REINFORCEMENT PAD FOR @

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)

The Line Summary Area -400 -401 -402 -403 -404 -405 -406 -407 -408 -409 -410 - - - TRACED$PIPE - - LAGGED$PIPE - PIPE$SUPPORT - - COMPN$JOINT SCREWED$JOINT - SOCKET$WELD - - - FIELD$WELD - - - SHOP$WELD

- - - - - - - - - - - - - (User specified text on Drawing Frame) - - - - - - - - - - - - - (User specified text on Drawing Frame)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - [1] DENOTES PIPE SPOOL NO$

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 DENOTES PARTS LIST NO

ALIAS

The Printed Material List

-411 -317 -318 -360 -361 -386 -387

SITE$CONNECTION - - - - - - PIPE NS - - - - CL LENGTH - - - - - - - - - -FT - - - - - - - FT-INS

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - (Normally Blank) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - (Normally Blank)

The Printed Material List -332 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PAGE -333 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PIPELINE REF -336 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SYSTEM REF

The Weld Box Summary -412 -413 -414 -415 -416 -417 -418 -419 -420 -421 -422 -423 -424 -438 -504 -507 -508 -509 -510 -511 -513 -516 -517 -518 -519 -520 -521 -522 -523 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S - - - F - - - O - - BW - - SW - - MW - -LUG - -SOF - SOB - - LET - SLW - SEAM

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -RPD - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -LF - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -L4

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)
-PAD - TW -TRN - - 5 - - 1 - EB - RL - FW

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)

ALIAS

Flat Spools and Flange Rotation

-524 -525 -526 -527 -528 -529 -530 -531 -532

-(Normally blank) -(Normally blank) -(Normally blank) -(Normally blank) -(Normally blank) -(Normally blank) -(Normally blank) -(Normally blank) -(Normally blank)

Flat Spools and Flange Rotation -481 -482 -483 -484 -485 -486 -487 -488 -489 -490 -491 -492 -493 -494 -495 -496 -497
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - N - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -W - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - U - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - D - - -*** REFERENCE FLAT *** -*** REFERENCE SPINDLE *** *** REFERENCE SUPPORT *** -*** REFERENCE BRANCH *** *** REFERENCE WINDOW *** - - - - - - -FLAT DIRECTION - - - - -SPINDLE DIRECTION - - - - SUPPORT DIRECTION - - - - -BRANCH DIRECTION - - - - WINDOW DIRECTION - - - - FLANGE ROTATION ?

The COMPIPE Material Control Links -299 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -/ -453 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - MM-

SPOOLGEN (FFISYS) Screen Display -800 -801 -802 -803 -804 -805 -806 -807
- - - - - - - - BEND - - - - - - - ELBOW - - - - - - - - OLET - - - - - - - - - TEE - - - - - - - CROSS - - - - - REDUCER - - - TEE REDUCER REDUCING FLANGE

ALIAS

SPOOLGEN (FFISYS) Screen Display

-808 -809 -810 -811 -812 -813 -814 -815 -816 -817 -818 -819 -820 -821 -822 -823 -824 -825 -826 -827 -828 -829 -830 -831 -832 -833 -834
-835 -836 -837 -838 -839

- - - - - - TEE BEND/ELBOW - - - - - - - - ANGLE VALVE - - - - - - - - 3 WAY VALVE - - - - - - - - 4 WAY VALVE - - - - - - - - -INSTRUMENT - - - - - MISC COMPONENT - - - - - - - - - -PIPE (TUBE - - - - - - - - - - FIXED PIPE - - - - - - - - - PIPE BLOCK - - - - - - - - - - - FLANGE - - - - - - - - LJSE FLANGE - - - - - - - -BLIND FLANGE - - - - - - - - - CONNECTOR - - - - - - - - BACKING NUT - - - - - - - - - - - - CLAMP MISC HYGENIC COMPONENT - - - - - - - - - - - - - -CAP - - - - - - - - - - COUPLING - - - - - - - - - - - - UNION - - - - - - - - - - - - VALVE - - - - - - - - - - - - - TRAP - - - - - - - - - - - - - VENT - - - - - - - - - - - - FILTER - - - - - - - - - - SUPPORT - - - - - - INSTRUMENT TEE - - - - - - - - - - - - -WELD - - - - - - - - - - - - - NONE

-840 -841 -842 -843 -844 -845 -846 -847 -848 -849 -850 -851 -852 -853 -854 -

- - - - (Not Used) - - - - (Not Used) - - - - (Not Used) - - - - (Not Used) - - - - (Not Used) Changed to Bend

- - - - - - Flange set to Loose - - - - - - - - - Detail Sketch ? Support changed to Fabrication - Support changed to Erection - Support changed to Offshore - - - - - - - - - - - Tack Weld - - - - - - - -Support(s) added - - - - - - - - Automatic Weld - - - - - - - - - - - Shop Test - - - REDUCING-CONCENTRIC - - - - REDUCING ECCENTRIC - - - - - STUB/BACKING PAIR - - - - - - - - - - - SCREWED - - - - - - - - SLIP-ON J TYPE

ALIAS

Reference Plane System

-855 -856 -857 -858 -859 -860 -861 -862 -863 -864 -865 -866 -867 -868 -869 -870 -871 -872 -873 -874 -875 -876 -877 -878 -879 -880 -881 -882 -883 -884 -885 -886 -887 -888 -889 -890 -891 -892

- - - - - - - - - - - SLIP-ON - - - - - - - -SOCKET-WELD - - - - - - - - - WELD-NECK - - - - - - SLIP-ON ORIFICE - - - - WELD-NECK ORIFICE - - - - - - - LAP-JOINT RING - - - - LAP-JOINT STUB END - - - - - - - - - - UNKNOWN - - - - - - - - Material added - General Information Note - ? -Specific Information Note - ? - - - - - - - - - Weld deleted - - - Support Weld(s) deleted - - - - - Spool Name deleted - - - - - -Flow Arrow deleted - - - - - - - Message deleted - - - - -Detail Sketch deleted - - - Information Note deleted - -Additional Material deleted - - - - - Loose Flange un-set - - - - -Location point added - - - - Location point deleted FLOOR/WALL PENETRATION - - - - - - - - FLOW ARROW - - - - INSULATION SYMBOL - - - - - - - - - - MESSAGE - - Drawing Identifier deleted - - - - - - - - - Default Start - - - - - - - - - Pipeline Start - - - Default Bypass Closure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - Bypass Closure - - - - - Pipe Support added - - - - - Pipe Support deleted - - - - - Properties changed - - - - - - - Coupling Added - - - - - - - Coupling Deleted - - - - Pipe Support Changed

Reference Plane System -443 -444 -445 -446 -447


^+? -^ - ? ^+? -^ - ? ^+?

ALIAS

Reference Plane System

-448 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -^ - ? -449 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)

Versions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 45

ALIAS

AText

What is AText?
AText is an abbreviation for Alternative Text, a powerful ISOGEN feature that enables any text on the isometric drawing to be easily changed or removed.

How It Works - The Basics


The feature operates by assigning a unique identification number to each standard text string, this number is then simply referred to whenever a change needs to be done to the text string that the number represents. By definition, a standard text string may either be a single character, a single word, or a group of words. Furthermore, some ATexts are, by default, set to an all blank word. The total number of separate standard text strings held by the program in this way is in excess of 300.

What AText Can Be Used For


AText allows Users to substitute their own text terminology or language in place of the standard ISOGEN words on the isometric. To effect a word change, you don't have to replace all the standard AText, as little as just one word may be changed if that's all is needed. Although the AText feature has a considerable degree of built-in flexibility, users must exercise a certain amount of care when defining their own words, particularly in respect of word lengths. As a general rule, newly defined words or word strings should be about equal in length or shorter than the text that is being replaced. (Obvious exceptions to this are the cases of the single line headings in the Material List region). In this respect, the user takes full responsibility for word definition and ISOGEN will not warn you in cases where words are too long and hence cannot be accommodated in the standard space provided on the isometric.

ALIAS
- 12 -

Badly designed AText can lead to undesirable results such as over-writing or incorrectly positioned text.

Foreign Language Use


AText can be of particular benefit to foreign language Users who wish to produce isometrics containing text in their native tongue. However there are restrictions governing which characters are permissible. For details, see the following paragraph dealing with usable characters.

The Usable Character Set


There is a requirement that only standard English and certain special purpose characters, as listed here, are used in AText definitions,. Upper or lower case letters in the range A to Z. Numeric characters in the range 0 to 9 inclusive. A blank space character. The special purpose symbols * + - . , : [ ] ( ) # ' < > = | & %

Other foreign language characters as used in such alphabets as Cyrillic, Greek, or Chinese are excluded, as are specially accentuated characters, for example, , , , etc. as used in certain European languages.

Special Characters
i) The Dollar sign ($)
This special character, that is used in ISOGEN to force a New Line in regular isometric Message Text can also be used with ATexts. The recommendation is that, when the $ character is used in ATexts, Users should accept full responsibility and carefully check the output results of each occurrence.

ii) The Question mark (?)


Has two different uses, as follows: Can be used in AText's -210, -211 and -212 to suppress the plotting of the single characters normally associated with these AText's, without switching off their associated facility, as would normally happen when an AText is set to blank. For example, setting Atext -210 ? just causes the F that would normally be plotted to be suppressed. It does not completely suppress the plotting of the Flange Material List Part Number as would normally happen when an Atext item is set to blank. This can be particularly advantageous on Spool isometrics. The ? character is also used in some special AText's at points where the program dynamically edits in information. E.g. By default, AText -456 is set to DETAIL ?. With this AText the program edits in either a letter or a

ALIAS
- 13 -

number (depending upon which system the user has specified) at the position of the ? character.

iii) The 'at' sign (@)


This character may be used to 'pad out' an AText string with trailing blanks. This would be done so that if required, other text, following the AText, would have a series a blanks between it and the AText.

AText And The Drawing Frame Symbols


The AText feature goes further than just controlling text characters. The standard symbols appearing in the Line Summary area across the bottom of the standard ISOGEN Drawing Frame, viz. for Shop Weld, Field Weld, etc. through to Traced Pipe, may all be suppressed when they are not required by setting their associated ATexts to blank.

Composite Text Messages


Composite text messages are made up from more than one text item and the composition is done by ISOGEN automatically. Such messages may be composed in either of the following two ways: By combining two or more related ATexts, or By combining AText and an associated design database attribute value.

Generally, in those cases where AText operates together with design database attribute information to form a composite message, setting the AText part to blank to suppress the plotting of it causes suppression of the attribute text also. For example, if the composite message BATCH REF: 12/100A/C in the Title Block area needs to be completely suppressed, then setting AText -252 which contains the words BATCH REF to blank will cause both this and the attribute part, 12/100A/C not to be plotted.

Identification Number Format


Identification numbers are always negative and hence must be preceded by a minus sign, for example, the AText identification number -249 on page 18 represents the default word WEST which is used in the main Isometric Drawing Area.

Grouping Of Text
All the AText listings are logically grouped into the following isometric drawing regions: The Main Isometric Drawing Area.

ALIAS
- 14 -

Plotted Material List and Cut List. Specification Change indication. Title Block / Drawing Frame. Line Summary Area. Printed Material List. Weld Box Summary. Flat Spools and Flange Rotation text. Compipe Material Control link. SPOOLGEN (FFISYS) Screen Display.

To enable fast look-up, the following pages list all the ATexts (together with their associated identification numbers) sectionalised on the above grouping basis.

Examples
Some examples of standard AText are as follows: The Material List heading ERECTION MATERIALS. The isometric Connection Messages CONN. TO and CONT. ON in the main drawing area. The Headings BATCH REF and PIPING SPEC in the Title Block Area.

All these are default AText words that are 'programmed in' by ISOGEN but which may be 're-programmed' by the user to change them if required in the way described below.

Example 1. ERECTION MATERIALS


This can be found on page 27 as AText identification number -310. To change the heading ERECTION MATERIALS to CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, the entry: -

310 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS


would have to appear in the appropriate data input file.

Example 2. CONN. TO
This is an example of a composite Message that is used at locations where pipelines are connected to Equipment Nozzles. The AText for it can be found on page 16 against identification number -208. To change the message CONN. TO to JOIN TO the entry: -208 JOIN TO would have to appear in the appropriate data input file. Information regarding the 'joined to' component, that is, the Nozzle name as extracted from the design database, is automatically appended to the AText by ISOGEN to form a composite message. E.g. JOIN TO D45-NZ12.

ALIAS
- 15 -

The Isometric Drawing Area

Example 3. BATCH REF


This is a another composite message example which can be found on page 25 as AText identification number -252. The message is used to convey plant Zone or Area information in the Title Block area of the isometric where the contents of the BATCH (AREA) type record in the Pipeline Input Data File is automatically appended by ISOGEN. E.g. BATCH REF : AR-A/TF/N12. To remove the Batch Reference entry from the isometric, set the AText entry in the IDF to blank, thus: -252 This would have the effect of removing the entire composite message from the isometric, that is, both the AText BATCH REF : part and the following design database attribute that holds the batch reference information.

The Isometric Drawing Area


-201 E -202 N -203 W -204 S -205 EL + -206 EL -207 ?NS Denotes East at east co-ordinates. Denotes North at north co-ordinates. Denotes West at west co-ordinates. Denotes South at south co-ordinates. Denotes a positive Elevation at elevation co-ordinates. Denotes a negative Elevation at elevation co-ordinates. Denotes the pipe Nominal Size. By setting the AText to blank the nominal size message will be suppressed. Using a? symbol will determine the format used for outputting the nominal size message. Denotes CONNected TO - where a Pipeline/Branch end is connected to a Nozzle. Denotes 'CONTinued ON' - at the point where a Pipeline/Branch end is continued onto another Pipeline. It is used in conjunction with END-CONNECTION type record. Is also used with AText -255 to create a 'CONT. ON DRG 2' type message when a pipeline is split into multiple drawings. (Isometric drawing area and Material List overflow). Denotes Flange, the letter used with the material list cross reference pointer for flanges. Denotes Gaskets, the letter used with the material list cross reference pointer for gaskets. Denotes Bolts, the letter used with the material list cross reference pointer for bolts.

-208 CONN. TO -209 CONT. ON

-210 F -211 G -212 B

ALIAS
- 16 -

The Isometric Drawing Area

-213 SPINDLE -214 MM

Is used to indicate the direction of an Operating Spindle on a Valve when it is not pointing in a primary direction. Denotes Millimetres. Used with arrowed dimensions on Angle and Multi-way Valves to indicate leg length.

-215 REDUCING FLANGE An Identification message that points at a Reducing Flange. -216 OFFSET This message is used where a dimensional offset occurs. E.g. Eccentric Reducer, Offset Reducing Flange, all forms of Offset Blocks. User can use a ? symbol to determine format used for outputting the offset messages. By setting this AText to blank the offset message will be suppressed. -217 MITRE -218 LOBSTER -219 REINFORCED This message is used on Mitred Bends. It is used in conjunction with AText -231 'BEND'). This message is used on Lobster Back Bends. (It is used in conjunction with AText -231 'BEND'). An identification message that points to a Reinforced Tee or Cross when the symbol key is TERF or CRRF and no Reinforcement Pad component is called for. A distinguishing message that points to a Flange where the LOOSE indicator is set. Distinguishing message that points to a Field Fit Weld. Used in conjunction with the Fall symbol to denote a FALLing line. User can use a ? symbol to determine the format used for outputting the falling line messages By setting this AText to blank the falling line message will now be suppressed but the fall indication symbol will still be shown. -223 (Normally blank) Produces a program generated degree symbol () which is output at all angle indicators requiring a degree symbol (bends, Falls, etc.). This symbol is used for Falling lines specified with a ratio. E.g. 1:10. Produces a program generated % symbol used on Falling pipelines specified with a percentage indication. Is used where a Falling line is specified in Gradiens. Is used where a Falling line is specified as an incline in Metric units. (i.e. Millimetres per Metre). Used where a Falling line is specified as an incline in Imperial units. (i.e. Inches per Foot).

-220 LEFT LOOSE -221 FFW -222 FALL

-224 : -225 (Normally blank) -226 GRAD -227 PER M -228 PER FT

-229 SCREWED END The message points to a pipe end that has been set to

ALIAS
- 17 -

The Isometric Drawing Area

Screwed in the Pipeline Input Data File. -230 VENT The message points to a Vent position at any open ended pipe. It is used in conjunction with an END-POSITION-VENT type record. Used in conjunction with AText -217 and AText -218 to identify Mitre and Lobster back type Bends. Identification message points to any place in the pipe where the Piping Specification changes. The name of the new Specification is automatically indicated. Identifies a Connector as part of a Material List cross reference. e.g. C13 in a box. Identifies a Support as part of a Material List cross reference. e.g. S22 in a box. Is the Inch sign indicator used in Imperial Dimensions, Co-ordinates and Nominal Size outputs. Is the Feet sign indicator used in Imperial Dimensions and Co-ordinates. The message points to a Drain position any Open ended pipe. It is used in conjunction with an END-POSITION-DRAIN type record This AText is blank by default but can be used to produce a message at any Open ended pipe. It is used in conjunction with an END-POSITION-OPEN type record. This AText is blank by default but can be used to produce a message at any Closed ended pipe. It is used in conjunction with an END-POSITION-CLOSED type record. This AText is blank by default but can be used to produce a message at any miscellaneous pipe end. It is used in conjunction with an END-POSITION-NULL type record. This AText has no default text but if it is set to a word (E.g. FLAT) by the user, then that text will act as a trigger to output the flat direction of eccentric reducers that have their flat side pointing in a primary direction. (Is used in conjunction with ATexts -244 to -249 inclusive).

-231 BEND -232 SPEC

-233 C -236 S -237 " -238 ' -239 DRAIN

-240 (Normally blank)

-241 (Normally blank)

-242 (Normally blank)

-243 (Normally blank)

ALIAS
- 18 -

The Isometric Drawing Area

The following six ATexts are used to output directions in conjunction with other ATexts on items that carry a direction setting on the component record in the Pipeline Input Data File. -244 UP -245 DOWN -246 NORTH -247 SOUTH -248 EAST -249 WEST -275 SWEPT TEE -276 CONT. FROM This message points to a Tee whose symbol key starts with the characters TS. Denotes CONTinued FROM. This message is plotted when a pipeline is split onto two or more drawings. i.e. CONT. FROM DRG 1. (The text - DRG comes from AText -255).
Used in conjunction with Atexts -243, -278, -280, -281 and -282 to append a primary direction as part of a composite message.

-277 ORIFICE FLANGE This text points to Orifice Flanges. -278 DIAL FACE This text points to Instruments Dials whose symbol key starts with the characters ID and is followed by a relevant direction letter. See following note ++. Denotes Lap Joint Stub End, the letter used with the Material List cross reference pointer for LJSE's. This text points to Orifice Plates and is followed by a relevant direction letter. See following note ++. This text points to Spectacle Blinds and Slip Plates and is followed a by relevant direction letter. See following note ++. This text points to a Site Glass and is followed by a relevant direction letter. See following note ++. Used to identify non primary flat directions on Eccentric Reducers. The contents of this AText will be output in front of the contents of a DIRECTION record containing the Flat skew direction

-279 L -280 TAPPING -281 TAIL

-282 WINDOW -283 FLAT

AText Numbers -243, -278, -280, -281 and -282are only output if a primary direction is set in the component record in the Pipeline Input Data File. The appropriate direction (as defined by ATexts -244 to -249) will be appended to the specific fitting text to make a composite message. (E.g. DIAL FACE WEST). Alternatively the content of any DIRECTION (Compound Directions) record could be appended.

ALIAS
- 19 -

The Isometric Drawing Area

-284 TEE BEND

This text is plotted at Bends that have an off-line leg.

-285 RATING FLANGEThis text is a part of a facility that provides an extra message at a Flange that has a different pressure rating to standard. This is achieved by giving the mating Gasket a symbol key of the required rating (E.g. 300#) in the Intermediate Data File (IDF). The facility is only used on Fixed Length piping. -286 (Normally blank) This AText is blank by default, but if set it will output the text as a message on screwed Erection (Construction) fittings.

-287 ORIENTATION DIRECTION Is used to identify the direction of skewed branches in cases where skew box indication has been suppressed. A program generated direction will be appended to this text to form a complete message. -288 PIPE -298 TEE ELBOW Is used on System Isometrics to denote the position(s) of a change in the Pipeline Reference. Is used to identify a Tee Elbow fitting.

-337 D BEND RADIUSIs used to output the text D BEND RADIUS on individual Pulled Bends where the bend radius is expressed in terms of a number of pipe diameters. The bend radius value is extracted from a BEND-RADIUS type record in the Pipeline Input Data File and used as a prefix to this AText. -338 BEND RADIUS Is used to output the text BEND RADIUS on individual Pulled Bends where the bend radius is expressed in terms of the dimensional units in use. The bend radius value is extracted from a BEND-RADIUS type record in the Pipeline Input Data File and used as a prefix to this AText. -346 GEARBOX ORIENTATION Is used in conjunction with directional information taken from a GEARBOX type record in the Pipeline Input Data File and which is appended to this AText. -349 PP Is used to indicate Personal Protection type insulation on Insulation Indication symbols having the symbol key 'INPP'.

-350 REDUCING ELBOW Is used to indicate a REDUCING ELBOW on fittings having the symbol key ER**. -356 U Special ATEXT used only to identify Special type Pulled Bends. Is used both on the isometric area and on the Material List. Special ATEXT used only to identify Special type Erection Welds. Is used both on the isometric area and on the Material List. Special ATEXT used only to identify Special type Fabrication Welds. Is used both on the isometric area

-357 B

-358 W

ALIAS
- 20 -

The Isometric Drawing Area

and on the Material List. -362 END$ONE Used in special circumstances when it is necessary to identify a specific end on a Spool isometric. (It also appears in the Cut Pipe List section for use as a Column Heading on the Cut Pipe List).

-388 TANGENTIAL CONNECTIONUsed to identify Tangential / Offset connections. In cases where the Tapping Point method is used, the existing TAPPING CONNECTION (AText No. -451) message will not be output. -389 OFFSET CONNECTIONUsed to identify Tangential / Offset connections. In cases where the Tapping Point method is used, the existing TAPPING CONNECTION (AText No. -451) message will not be output. -390 FROM ? ORIGIN Used to identify Tangential / Offset connections. In cases where the Tapping Point method is used, the existing TAPPING CONNECTION (AText No. -451) message will not be output. -391 (Normally Blank) Used to identify Tangential / Offset connections. In cases where the Tapping Point method is used, the existing TAPPING CONNECTION (AText No. -451) message will not be output. Used where multiple component attributes are present for a particular material entry. Used to distinguish an accumulated pipe sub-total, from an individual pipe entry. Used to indicate the weld type for Seal Welds on the isometric drawing. Distinguishing message that points to a User positioned set on connections. Distinguishing message that points to a User positioned set in connections. This AText has no default text but if it is set to a word (E.g. FLAT) by the user, then that text will act as a trigger to output the flat direction of eccentric reducers that have their flat side pointing in a primary direction. (Is used in conjunction with ATexts -244 to -249 nclusive). Used to allow metric dimensions to have their dimensional units output on the isometric drawing.

-392 MULTIPLE -394 TOT -425 SEAL WELD -433 (Normally blank) 434

STUB IN

-243 (Normally blank)

-437 (Normally blank)

-451 TAPPING CONNECTION Is output along with Co-ordinate values at the Tapping Point on a user defined fitting. Requires Option Switch 122 to be set to 1 for Tapping Co-ordinates output on the isometric drawing. -452 UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT Indicates that an unacceptable drawing split point has been found in Tube. When used, the

ALIAS
- 21 -

The Isometric Drawing Area

message is output in the top LH corner of each affected drawing. -454 CONNECTION ORIENTATION Used at un-developed Set-On Tees and Olets (which have no Branch leg and are indicated in dotted form on the pipeline) where the intended branch connection is in a skewed direction. A program generated direction word will be appended to this text to form a composite message. -455 (Normally blank) Used at Flange positions in vertical pipe legs to optionally indicate the elevation co-ordinate of the flange connection face. The special characters ? and $ may be combined with this AText to allow the user to control the final form of the output text. ? is used to cause the insertion of elevation value and $ forces a new line of text. For example, a setting of ?$FLANGE FACE would produce:EL +22613 FLANGE FACE Note that here, the EL characters are obtained by the program also using AText -205 automatically. Used to provide a cross-reference message for Detail Sketches. This AText appears on the drawing part of the isometric. The Sketch identifying number or letter is edited in by the program at the ? position. Used to identify Mitre Welds. The program edits in the Mitre angle into the text string at the ? position which may be positioned anywhere in the string. Used to indicate the Nominal Size for Metric Bore Units e.g. if set to mm the output would be 32mm NS, if set to Blank, 32NS is output. Used to show thickness of a Penetration Plate on the drawing.

-456 SEE DETAIL ?

-457 MITRE ?

-458 (Normally Blank)

-459 ?THK

-469 REFERENCE POINTUsed to identify a Reference Dimension Item co- ordinates. -470 SUPPORT LOCATION Used to identify Pipe Support co-ordinates. -477 CUT OUT ? Used on the drawing to show the location of where material should be removed.

The following nine ATexts are all used for the identification of external Reference Items when using the Reference Dimension facility. Any associated text elements will be automatically pre-fixed or appended, as appropriate, to the specified AText element. In all these ATexts, the $ character causes a new line to be plotted and a ? character is where the program edits in the element name (from any -37, 70, 71 or 72 type record) to derive the full text string. -460 BEAM$? -461 COLUMN$? Identifies horizontal Steel-work element (SKEY HST*). Identifies Vertical Steel-work element (SKEY VST*).

ALIAS
- 22 -

The Isometric Drawing Area

-462 ?$BUILDING CL Identifies centre-line of Building (SKEY BLD*). -463 CL EQUIPMENT$?Identifies centre-line of Equipment (SKEY EQU*). -464 CL PIPELINE$? Identifies centre-line of Pipeline (SKEY PIP*). -465 ?$FLOOR LEVELIdentifies specified Floor Level (SKEY FLR*). -466 ?$WALL -467 GRID LINE$? -468 ? Identifies specified Wall position (SKEY WAL*). Identifies Project Grid Line (SKEY GRD*). Used for miscellaneous user defined elements (SKEY XXX*). The default ? character causes any identification name associated with the miscellaneous reference to be used when no other AText setting is made.

-471 LOCATION-POINT?Is used to indicate a Location Point position on the plotted isometric. If more than one is included on any single isometric, a simple ID number is generated and output in the position indicated by the ? -475 (Normally blank) Used in SPOOLGEN - Probing module. If set will be used to indicate the position of any Location Points that are included in an incoming Pipeline Data File. Used in SPOOLGEN to trigger the indication of drawing identifiers. If set by User, the text points to a Site Weld.

-476 (Normally blank) -498 (Normally blank)

-499 SHOP TEST WELDPoints to either a Site Weld or a Field Fit Weld that requires a Shop Test Weld to be performed at the same location. (That is, Welds with the Key WSST or WFST). -501 (Normally blank) -502 SUPPORT Used to point to an Offshore Weld If Set By User. Used to indicate the orientation of a Pipe Support. Content of associated DIRECTION record (containing compound directions for Skewed Support) is appended to AText. Distinguishing message that points to a User positioned Tack Weld. Used to identify Field Items on an Erection type isometric whenever a new style Operations Box is requested (O.S. 53 Position 2 set to 2). Used to identify a Random Length on an Erection type isometric whenever a new style Operations Box is requested (O.S. 53 Position 2 set to 2). Used to identify a Pipe Support on an Erection type isometric whenever a new style Operations Box is requested (O.S. 53 Position 2 set to 2). Used to identify a Valve on an Erection type isometric whenever a new style Operations Box is requested

-512 TACK WELD -533 FI

-534 RL

-535 SU

-536 VL

ALIAS
- 23 -

Specification Change Indication

(O.S. 53 Position 2 set to 2). -539 . Used as a delimiter between the Material List Cross-Reference Identifier and the Suffix that is added as a unique Component Identifier in the new style of Identifier (i.e. 3.1, 3.2, 3.3 as opposed to 3). Used as delimiter/identifier in General Note names. Used as delimiter/identifier in General Note names. Used in SPOOLGEN Probing module. If set will be used to indicate the position of any Special Note names that are included in an incoming Pipeline Data File. Used in SPOOLGEN Probing module. If set will be used to indicate the position of any Additional Materials that are included in an incoming Pipeline Data File. Used as a separator between Part Numbers when outputting dual numbers for associated Additional Material identification on the plotted iso. FFISYS atext for FF isometric continuation message delimiter.

-541 _N -542 _S -543 (Normally blank)

-544 (Normally blank)

-545 /

-885 -

Specification Change Indication


The following ATexts are used for the indication of Specification Changes on the isometric drawing:-289 MATL Used to indicate a Piping Material Specification. change. The content of the PIPING-SPEC type record in the Pipeline Input Data File is appended to the AText to form a composite message. Used to indicate an Insulation Specification change. The content of the INSULATION-SPEC type record in the Pipeline Input Data File is appended to the AText to form a composite message. Used to indicate a Tracing Specification change. The content of the TRACING-SPEC type record in the Pipeline Input Data File is appended to the AText to form a composite message. Used to indicate a PAINTING Specification change. The content of the PAINTING-SPEC type record in the Pipeline Input Data File is appended to the AText to form a composite message.

-290 INSUL

-291 TRACE

-292 PAINT

ALIAS
- 24 -

The Title Block/Drawing Frame Areas

-293 (Normally blank)

Reserved for User defined AText. The contents of a MISC-SPEC1 type record in the Pipeline Input Data File is appended to the AText to form a composite message. Reserved for User defined AText. The contents of a MISC-SPEC2 type record in the Pipeline Input Data File is appended to the AText to form a composite message. Reserved for User defined AText. The contents of a MISC-SPEC3 type record in the Pipeline Input Data File is appended to the AText to form a composite message. Reserved for user defined AText. The contents of a MISC-SPEC4 type record in the Pipeline Input Data File is appended to the AText to form a composite message. Reserved for user defined AText. The contents of a MISC-SPEC5 type record in the Pipeline Input Data File is appended to the AText to form a composite message.

-294 (Normally blank)

-295 (Normally blank)

-296 (Normally blank)

-297 (Normally blank)

The Title Block/Drawing Frame Areas


-250 DATE The Date is taken from the DATE type record in the Pipeline Input Data File and automatically appended in the required format (UK, EUR or USA) to the AText.

If the Date format is set to UK (see Option Switch 6 for details) this AText also uses ATexts -258, -259, -260, -261, -262, -263, -264, -265, -266, -267, -268 and 269 to form the month part of the date output text. -251 PROJECT NO. This is used in the Title Block if the Project Number has been set in a PROJECT-IDENTIFIER type record in the Pipeline Input Data File. The content of this record is appended to the AText to form a composite message. This is used in the Title Block area if a Batch Reference has been set in a BATCH type record in the Pipeline Input Data File. The content of this record is appended to the AText to form a composite message. Used in the Title Block if a Piping Specification has been set in a PIPING-SPEC type record in the Pipeline Input Data File. The content of this record is appended to the AText to form a composite message. Used in the Title Block if an Issue (also know as Revision) identifier has been set in a REVISION type record in the Pipeline Input Data File. The content of this

-252 BATCH REF

-253 PIPING SPEC

-254 ISS

ALIAS
- 25 -

The Title Block/Drawing Frame Areas

record is appended to the AText to form a composite message. -255 DRG Used in conjunction with AText -256 to generate a drawing identifier of the form - DRG n OF n - in cases where a pipeline is split into multiple isometrics.

This AText is used in conjunction with AText -209 and AText -276 to form a composite message. -256 OF -257 SPL Used in conjunction with AText -255. Used on spool isometric drawings for the identification of individual spool pieces. A program generated Spool Number is appended to the AText to form a composite message. This AText is not used if either a Spool Prefix (SPOOL-PREFIX type record) or Spool Identifiers (SPOOL-IDENTIFIER type records) are included in the Pipeline Input Data File. Used in conjunction with AText -250. Used in conjunction with AText -250. Used in conjunction with AText -250. Used in conjunction with AText -250. Used in conjunction with AText -250. Used in conjunction with AText -250. Used in conjunction with AText -250. Used in conjunction with AText -250. Used in conjunction with AText -250. Used in conjunction with AText -250. Used in conjunction with AText -250. Used in conjunction with AText -250.

-258 JAN -259 FEB -260 MAR -261 APR -262 MAY -263 JUN -264 JUL -265 AUG -266 SEP -267 OCT -268 NOV -269 DEC

-270 THERMAL INSULATION SPEC Used in the Title Block if an Insulation Specification identifier has been set in a INSULATION-SPEC record in the Pipeline Input Data File. The content of this record is appended to the AText to form a composite message. -271 TRACING SPEC Used in the title block if a Tracing Specification identifier has been set in a TRACING-SPEC type record in the Pipeline Input Data File. The content of this record is appended to the AText to form a composite message. -272 PAINTING SPEC Used in the Title Block if a Painting Specification identifier has been set in a PAINTING-SPEC type record in the Pipeline Input Data File. The content of this record is appended to the AText to form a

ALIAS
- 26 -

The Plotted Material And Cut Pipe List Heading Texts

composite message. -436 JACKET SPEC Used in the Title Block if a Jacket Specification identifier has been set in a JACKET-SPEC type record in the Pipeline Input Data File. The content of this record is appended to the AText to form a composite message.

The Plotted Material And Cut Pipe List Heading Texts


-274 (Normally blank) If set will be used as a separator between the Pipeline Reference and the Spool Identifier in the Spool isometric drawing identifier.

-300 FABRICATION MATERIALS Is the category heading under which components required for 'SHOP' Fabrication are listed. -301 PT -302 NO Is the Part Number heading used in conjunction with AText -302 to form a composite message. Used in conjunction with AText -301 to form a composite message.

-303 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Is the heading in the Material Listing under which Components are described according to their catalogue component description. -304 N.S. Is the heading under which the Nominal Size of each item is listed. Is used in conjunction with AText -330 or AText -331 to form a composite message. Is the heading under which Component Identification Codes are listed. Is the heading under which the Required Quantities are listed. Is the group sub-heading under which Pipe is listed. Is the group sub-heading under which Pipe Fittings are listed. E.g. elbows, tees, etc. Is the group sub-heading under which all Flanges are listed. (i.e.

-305 ITEM CODE -306 QTY -307 PIPE -308 FITTINGS -309 FLANGES

-310 ERECTION MATERIALS Is the category heading under which components required for 'SITE' Erection Construction) are listed. -311 GASKETS -312 BOLTS

Is the group sub-heading under which all Gaskets are listed Is the group sub-heading under which all Bolts are

ALIAS
- 27 -

The Plotted Material And Cut Pipe List Heading Texts

listed. -313 VALVES / IN-LINE ITEMS Is the group sub-heading under which all Valves and In-line Items are listed. -314 INSTRUMENTS Is the group sub-heading under which all Instruments are listed. -315 SUPPORTS -316 PIPE SPOOLS Is the group sub-heading under which all Supports are listed. Is the sub-heading under which all Spool Numbers are listed.

-319 CUT PIPE LENGTH Is the heading under which all the Cut Pipe Lengths are listed. -320 PIECE Is the sub-heading to AText -319 under which the Cut Pipe piece numbers are listed. This AText is used in conjunction with AText -321 to form a composite heading. Used in conjunction with AText -320 to form a composite heading. Is the sub-heading to AText -319 under which the actual Cut Pipe Lengths are listed. This AText is used in conjunction with AText -323 to form a composite heading. Used in conjunction with AText -322 to form a composite heading. Is the sub-heading to AText -319 under which one of the ATexts -326, -327, -328, or -500 if applicable, will be listed. Used for Spool Number separator on the Material List. Used for a Pulled Bend remark which will be listed under AText -324 if a Cut Pipe Length contains a Pulled Bend. Is a remark which will be listed under AText -324 if a Cut Pipe Length has a Loose Flange requirement. Is the Field Fit Weld remark which will be listed under AText -324 if a Cut Pipe Length contains a Field Fit Weld. Used to denote lengths of Pipe are in Metres. Also used to indicate unit type 'Metres' in Centre-Line Length Summary. Used to denote Nominal Sizes are in Inches. It is used in conjunction with AText -304 and AText -317. Denotes the Nominal Sizes are in Millimetres. Also used to indicate unit type 'Millimetres' in Centre-Line Length Summary. It is used in conjunction with AText -

-321 NO -322 CUT

-323 LENGTH -324 REMARKS

-325 (Normally blank) -326 PLD BEND

-327 LOOSE FLG -328 FF WELD

-329 M

-330 INS -331 MM

ALIAS
- 28 -

The Plotted Material And Cut Pipe List Heading Texts

304 and AText -317. -334 S Is used only on Fixed Length Piping. The contents of this AText is appended to the item code to form a composite code when one or more ends of the Fixed Length spool has a special flange.

-335 WITH SPECIAL RATING FLANGE(S) (SEE ISO) Is used only on Fixed Length piping. The contents of the AText are appended to the item description to form a composite message. Is used whenever AText -334 is used. -339 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS Is the group sub-heading under which all non-categorised components are listed. -340 INDUCTION BEND ID - Used to identify pipe required in the fabrication of Induction Bends. The Induction Bend tag is appended to the AText to form a complete text string. -341 EQUIPMENT TRIM MATERIALS Is the sub-heading under which all Equipment Trim materials are listed. -342 NOZZLE REF - Is the sub-heading under which all materials associated with an individual Nozzle are listed. The content of the related NOZZLE-REFERENCE is appended to the AText to form a complete text string. Used on Equipment Trim Drawings only. -343 CONTINUED Used with AText -342 to identify situations where the listing of components for a Nozzle is being continued from a previous drawing. Used on Equipment Trim Drawings only.

-344 END CONNECTORS Is the group sub-heading under which all materials for End Connectors for hygienic type piping are listed (liners, nuts, clamps, etc.). -345 AND Used with AText -342 to form a sub-heading under which all components associated with interconnected Nozzles are output on the Material List for an Equipment Trim drawing. The resultant heading would be of the form:- NOZZLE REF - N22 AND N23. This has no default AText but is available as an alternative to the AText used when generating a Material List overflow message at the bottom of the master drawing Material List (an AText -209 and AText -255 combination). Any AText set by the user will have a program generated cross reference drawing number appended to it to form a composite message. This has no default AText but is available as an alternative to the AText used when generating a Material List overflow message at the top of overflow Material List drawings (AText -276 and AText -255 combination). Any AText set by the user will have a program generated cross reference drawing number appended.

-347 (Normally blank)

-348 (Normally blank)

ALIAS
- 29 -

The Plotted Material And Cut Pipe List Heading Texts

-351 FABRICATED (PULLED) BEND Used to identify Fabricated Bends when listed as separate items on the Material List. -352 WEIGHT -353 KGS Column heading for Weight. Units indicator for Kilogram weights. Used as part of Weight column heading and in pipeline Weight summary area at bottom of Material List. Units indicator for Pound weights. Used as part of Weight column heading and in pipeline Weight summary area at bottom of Material List.

-354 LBS

-355 TOTAL WEIGHT-THIS DRG Identification text for Total Pipeline Weight in Weight column and also in Weight summary area at bottom of Material List. -356 U Special ATEXT used only to identify special type Pulled Bends. Is used both on the Material List and on the isometric area as a prefix to the Part Number. Special ATEXT used only to identify special type Erection Welds. Is used both on the Material List and on the isometric area as a prefix to the Part Number. Special ATEXT only to identify special type Fabrication Welds. Is used both on the Material List and on the isometric area as a prefix to the Part Number. Used for bolt units sub-heading. ISOGEN outputs in DIA x LENGTH sequence. Column heading on Cut Pipe List. (Also appears in the isometric drawing area section when it is necessary to identify a specific End of a Cut Piece). Column heading on Cut Pipe List. Last column heading on Cut Pipe List when Item Code heading is required. (See also AText -365). Alternative last column heading on Cut Pipe List. (See also AText -364). If Part Number is required on the Cut List instead of Item Code then AText -364 should be set to blank and AText -365 set to the required alternative heading. E.g. PART$NO. Used for Square Cut in End Condition columns on Cut Pipe List. Used for Bevel in End Condition columns on Cut Pipe List. Used for Screwed in End Condition columns on Cut Pipe List. Used for Shaped in End Condition columns on Cut Pipe List. Used for Mitred in End Condition columns on Cut Pipe

-357 B

-358 W

-359 (Normally blank) -362 END$ONE

-363 END$TWO -364 ITEM$CODE -365 (Normally blank)

-366 SQ.CUT -367 BEVEL -368 SCREWED -369 SHAPED -370 MITRED

ALIAS
- 30 -

The Plotted Material And Cut Pipe List Heading Texts

List. -371 OFFSHORE MATERIALS Is the category heading under which components required for 'OFFSHORE' erection are listed. -372 REMARKS -373 REM -374 ANGLE Remarks region heading at bottom of Material List where Remarks text is collectively listed. Remarks Column heading in Material List. Remark Reference Numbers are listed in this column. Used on special type Pulled Bends where angle information is appended to the item Description field on the Material List. Is the group sub-heading under which all Welds are listed. Used to identify Fabrication material when Category is used as a data item on a Style 2 or 3 Material List. Used to identify Erection material when Category is used as a data item on a Style 2 or 3 Material List. Used to identify Offshore material when Category is used as a data item on a Style 2 or 3 Material List.

-375 WELDS -376 FAB -377 EREC -378 OFF

-379 TOTAL FABRICATION WEIGHT Identification text for Total Fabrication Weight in Weight column and also in Weight Summary area at bottom of Material List. -380 TOTAL ERECTION WEIGHT Identification text for Total Erection Weight in Weight column and also in Weight Summary area at bottom of Material List. -381 TOTAL OFFSHORE WEIGHT Identification text for Total Offshore Weight in Weight column and also in Weight Summary area at bottom of Material List. -382 TOTAL WEIGHT UNLISTED ITEMS Identification text for the Total Weight of Unlisted Items in the Weight column and also in the Weight Summary Area at the bottom of the Material List. -383 * Missing Weight indicator. The * is a special marker that is used on both Weight and C Of G outputs to indicate that component(s) with zero Weight were encountered. Used in the REMARKS column of the Cut List to indicate where extra material has been added to a Cut Piece Length in order to provide a minimum Tangent Length for either a start or finish Bend Leg. Used in the Cut Piece Remarks section against cut pieces that have additional material added between adjacent bends. Used to indicate grooved end preparation for Victaulic

-384 TANGENT+

-385 CUT/WELD

-426 GROOVED

ALIAS
- 31 -

The Plotted Material And Cut Pipe List Heading Texts

pipe connections on the cut pipe list / report. -427 FLARED -428 SCREWED -431 SOCKET Used to indicate a flared end preparation on the cut pipe list / report. Used to indicate a female screwed end preparation on the cut pipe list / report. Used to indicate a female socket weld / compression / glued / push fit end preparation on the cut pipe list / report. Used to output a Location Point ID number on the Drawing Frame. Will only be output when multiple Location Points are included on a single isometric. Used as part of a Location Point position on the Drawing Frame. Used as part of a Location Point position on the Drawing Frame. Used on the Cut List to identify Cut Pieces that need to have an additional Shop Test allowance. (That is, Welds with the SKEY WSST or WFST). Used as either a Header or column identifier on the following Printed Output whenever Spool Identifiers are listed.i) Printed Material List (Style 1 or 2). ii) Printed Material Control File. iii) Printed Weld Summary. Used as the Item Code for a Reinforcement Pad whenever automatic Item Code generation requested. is

-472 No.?

-473 OF -474 ABOVE -500 SHOP TEST

-503 SPOOL ID

-514 REINFPAD

-515 REINFORCEMENT PAD FOR @ Used as the first part of a Description for a Reinforcement Pad whenever automatic Description generation is requested. The second part of the Pad Description will be the Description of the Main pipeline Tube to which the Pad is welded. -537 (Normally blank) If set, will be used as an alternative Units indication on any Length output on any style of Material List. (Overrules any Length Units setting in O.S. 24). If set, will be used to offer an alternative form of Bolt Diameter / Length output on any style of Material List. If set, will be used as an optional Column Heading for Bolt Diameter where the Bolt units are different to the normal Pipeline units.

-538 (Normally blank) -540 (Normally blank)

ALIAS
- 32 -

The Line Summary Area

The Line Summary Area


The ATexts that are used in the Line Summary area along the bottom of the isometric drawing can either have their ATexts changed or made blank. If the AText is changed, then its' associated symbol will be drawn. If it is set to blank, then the symbol will not be drawn.

In these ATexts, the inclusion of a $ sign creates a forced line feed causing the text to be plotted over two lines. -400 TRACED$PIPE -401 LAGGED$PIPE -402 PIPE$SUPPORT -403 COMPN$JOINT -404 SCREWED$JOINT -405 SOCKET$WELD -406 FIELD$WELD -407 SHOP$WELD -408 & -409 These two AText's have no default Text but may be used for any User specified general information on the Drawing Frame. A typical example would be:PULLED BEND RADIUS IS 3X NOMINAL PIPE BORE

-410 [1] DENOTES PIPE SPOOL NO$

1 DENOTES PARTS LIST NO This is a general note to signify how


Spool Numbers and Material List Part Numbers are shown on the isometric. If only the bottom line is required the records in the Pipeline Input Data File should be as shown below:-410 $ 1 DENOTES PARTS LIST NO -411 SITE$CONNECTION The following ATexts appear in the line summary area along the bottom of both the plotted and printed Material Lists. -317 PIPE NS Is used in conjunction with AText -318 to which the total Centre Line Length per bore is automatically computed and listed. Also uses AText -330 or AText 331 to indicate Units. Is used in conjunction with AText -317. Also uses AText -329 or AText -331 or AText -360 or AText -361 depending on Units being used Used to indicate unit type 'Feet' in pipe Centre-Line Length region.

-318 CL LENGTH

-360 FT

ALIAS
- 33 -

The Printed Material List

-361 FT-INS -386 -387

Used to indicate unit type 'Feet-Inches' in pipe CentreLine Length region. Blank is the default. Used to control output of insulation length. Blank is the default. Used to control output of heat trace length.

The Printed Material List


The ATexts listed below are used on the Printed Material List in addition to those ATexts listed for the Plotted Material and Cut Pipe Lists earlier. -332 PAGE -333 PIPELINE REF -336 SYSTEM REF This has a Page Number automatically appended. This has the appended. Pipeline Reference automatically

This is used as an alternative to AText -333 when producing Material List for System Isometrics. The contents of a SYSTEM-ISOMETRIC-REFERENCE record in the Pipeline Input Data File is automatically appended to the AText.

The Weld Box Summary


1) Standard Weld Summary Box.
Weld Box header details (line 1).

-412

WELD SHOP WELD WELDER VISUAL NDT HARD S.R FAB.QA

Continuation of Weld Box header details. (line 2) -413 NO /FLD PROC ID ACCEPT NO NO ACCEPT

The first column of this Weld Summary Box is used for the program generated Weld Number and optional prefix. The second column is for Weld category and contains the Shop / Field / Offshore indicators. This must be taken into account when making any changes to either of these two ATexts. -414 S -415 F -416 O Weld category identification - Shop. Weld category identification - Field. Weld category identification - Offshore.

ALIAS
- 34 -

The Weld Box Summary

One of the above characters is plotted in the Weld Category column (column 2), depending upon the type of Weld.

2) User Defined Weld Summary Box.


-417 BW -418 SW -419 MW -420 LUG -421 SOF -422 SOB -423 LET -424 SLW -438 SEAM Used for Weld type identifier Butt Weld. Used for Weld type identifier Socket Weld. Used for Weld type identifier Mitre Weld. Used for Weld type identifier LUGG. Used for Weld type identifier Slip-On Flange. Used for Weld type identifier Set-On Branch. Used for Weld type identifier 'LET E.g. Olet, Latrolet, Half Coupling, etc. Used to indicate the weld type for Seal Welds in welding lists and reports. Weld type identifier for a Seam Weld.

-504 (Normally blank) -507 RPD -508 LF

Can be set by the User and used to identify Field Fit Welds only when the Weld Category attribute is Output. Used for Weld type identifier for a Basic Reinforcing Pad Weld - when one extra Weld Number is requested. Used for Weld type identifier for a Reinforcing Pad to Main Pipeline Weld - when two extra Weld Numbers are requested. (Used together with AText -509). Used for Weld type identifier for a Reinforcing Pad to Branch Weld - when two extra Weld Numbers are requested. (Used together with AText -508). If set, will be used as the delimiter between the two Material List Identifiers in the 'Location' column of the Operations Box. Used as a Part Identifier in the 'Location' column of the Operations Box in cases where a Reinforcement Pad has not been included on the Material List. Weld type identifier for a Tack Weld. Weld type identifier for a Trunnion Weld. (i.e. The weld that connects the Trunnion to the Main Pipeline). Used for Weld Action Identification for a Manual Weld on the Operations List. Used for Weld Action Identification for an Automatic Weld on the Operations List.

-509 L4

-510 (Normally blank)

-511 PAD

-513 TW -516 TRN -517 5 -518 1

ALIAS
- 35 -

Flat Spools and Flange Rotation

-519 EB -520 RL -521 FW

Used for Pulled Bend identification on the Operations List. Used for Random Length identification on the Operations List. Used for Weld type identifier for a Fillet Weld. (The Basic Weld used for connecting Pipe Supports to the Pipeline). If set, will be used as an alternative to AText -422 to identify the Branch Connection Weld(s) for a Reinforced Tee or Cross. If set, will be used as an alternative to AText -422 to identify the Branch Connection Weld(s) for an Angled (not 90) Reinforced Tee or Cross. If set, will be used as an alternative to AText -422 to identify the Branch Connection Weld(s) for an Angled (not 90) Set-On Tee or Cross. If set, will be used for the Weld Type identifier for any Olet type component with an SKEY of HCSC or HCSW. If set, will be used for the Weld Type identifier for a Reinforcement Pad to Main Pipeline Weld on an Angled Branch - when two extra Weld numbers are requested. (Used together with AText -527). If set, will be used for the Weld Type identifier for a Reinforcement Pad to Branch Weld on an Angled Branch - when two extra Weld numbers are requested. (Used together with AText -526). If set, will be used for the Weld Type identifier for a Trunnion to Elbow / Bend connection. If set, will be used for the Weld Type identifier for a 90 Non-Reinforced Trunnion to Main Pipeline Weld. If set, will be used for the Weld Type identifier for an Angled Non-Reinforced Trunnion to Main Pipeline Weld. If set, will be used for the Weld Type identifier for a 90 Reinforced Trunnion to Main Pipeline Weld. If set, will be used for the Weld Type identifier for an Angled Reinforced Trunnion to Main Pipeline Weld.

-522 (Normally blank)

-523 (Normally blank)

-524 (Normally blank)

-525 (Normally blank) -526 (Normally blank)

-527 (Normally blank)

-528 (Normally blank) -529 (Normally blank) -530 (Normally blank)

-531 (Normally blank) -532 (Normally blank)

Flat Spools and Flange Rotation


The following six ATexts are used in DIRECTION records in the Pipeline Input Data File when indicating compound directions for certain components in Skewed

ALIAS
- 36 -

The COMPIPE Material Control Links

Pipelines. Also used when ISOGEN is generating ORIENTATION and CONNECTION DIRECTION Messages on Flat Spools. -481 E -482 N -483 W -484 S -485 U -486 D Denotes East. Denotes North. Denotes West. Denotes South. Denotes Up. Denotes Down.

-487 *** REFERENCE FLAT *** Used to identify which Eccentric Reducer Flat Direction is used as a reference for a given flange rotation. -488 *** REFERENCE SPINDLE *** Used to identify which Spindle is used as a reference for a given flange rotation. -489 *** REFERENCE SUPPORT *** Used to identify which Support is used as a reference for a given flange rotation. -490 *** REFERENCE BRANCH *** Used to identify which Branch is used as a reference for a given flange rotation. -491 *** REFERENCE WINDOW *** Used to identify which Window is used as a reference for a given flange rotation. -492 FLAT DIRECTIONUsed to point to 2D and 3D Skew enclosure triangles at Eccentric Reducers to indicate a Flat Direction on Flat Spools. -493 SPINDLE DIRECTION Used to point to 2D and 3D Skew enclosure triangles located at Spindles on Flat Spools. -494 SUPPORT DIRECTION Used to point to 2D and 3D Skew enclosure triangles located at Supports on Flat Spools. -495 BRANCH DIRECTION Used to point to 2D and 3D Skew enclosure triangles located at undeveloped Set-On Branches or single Olets on Flat Spools. -496 WINDOW DIRECTION Used to point to 2D and 3D Skew enclosure triangles located at Sight Glasses on Flat Spools. -497 FLANGE ROTATION ? Used to identify Flange Rotations on Flat Spools. (The calculated angle is edited in by the program at the position of the ? character).

The COMPIPE Material Control Links


-299 / Single character delimiter used between the three data items that are required to be in each ITEM-CODE

ALIAS
- 37 -

SPOOLGEN (FFISYS) Screen Display

record when using the COMPIPE link facility. -453 MMUsed to separate Nominal Size and Pipeline Reference when ISOGEN generates a drawing number for use in the COMPIPE.MTO file.

SPOOLGEN (FFISYS) Screen Display


The following 800 series ATexts are used in SPOOLGEN probing and the FFISYS. -800 BEND Identification of BEND when Probing. -801 ELBOW Identification of ELBOW when Probing. -802 OLET Identification of OLET when Probing. -803 TEE Identification of TEE when Probing. -804 CROSS Identification of CROSS when Probing. -805 REDUCER Identification of REDUCER when Probing. -806 TEE REDUCER Identification of TEE REDUCER when Probing. -807 REDUCING FLANGE Identification of REDUCING FLANGE when Probing. -808 TEE BEND/ELBOW Identification of TEE BEND/ELBOW when Probing. -809 ANGLE VALVE Identification of ANGLE VALVE when Probing. -810 3 WAY VALVE Identification of 3 WAY VALVE when Probing. -811 4 WAY VALVE Identification of 4 WAY VALVE when Probing. -812 INSTRUMENT

ALIAS
- 38 -

SPOOLGEN (FFISYS) Screen Display

Identification of INSTRUMENT when Probing. -813 MISC COMPONENT Identification of MISC COMPONENT when Probing. -814 PIPE (TUBE Identification of PIPE (TUBE) when Probing. -815 FIXED PIPE Identification of FIXED PIPE when Probing. -816 PIPE BLOCK Identification of PIPE BLOCK when Probing. -817 FLANGE Identification of FLANGE when Probing. -818 LJSE FLANGE Identification of LJSE FLANGE when Probing. -819 BLIND FLANGE Identification of BLIND FLANGE when Probing. -820 CONNECTOR Identification of CONNECTOR when Probing. -821 BACKING NUT Identification of BACKING NUT when Probing. -822 CLAMP Identification of CLAMP when Probing. -823 MISC HYGENIC COMPONENT Identification of MISC HYGENIC COMPONENT when Probing. -824 CAP Identification of CAP when Probing. -825 COUPLING Identification of COUPLING when Probing. -826 UNION Identification of UNION when Probing. -827 VALVE Identification of VALVE when Probing. -828 TRAP Identification of TRAP when Probing.

ALIAS
- 39 -

SPOOLGEN (FFISYS) Screen Display

-829 VENT Identification of VENT when Probing. -830 FILTER Identification of FILTER when Probing. -831 SUPPORT Identification of SUPPORT when Probing. -832 INSTRUMENT TEE Identification of INSTRUMENT TEE when Probing. -833 WELD Identification of WELD when Probing. -834 NONE Indication that NO component was located successfully when Probing.

-835 (Not Used)


Unused atext.

-836 (Not Used)


Unused atext.

-837 (Not Used)


Unused atext.

-838 (Not Used)


Unused atext.

-839 (Not Used)


Unused atext.

-840 Changed to Bend


Probing Action Message - Elbow changed to Bend. -841 Flange set to Loose Probing Action Message - Flange set to loose. -842 Detail Sketch ? Probing Action Message - Detail Sketch added. -843 Support changed to Fabrication Probing Action Message - Support changed to fabrication. -844 Support changed to Erection Probing Action Message - Support changed to Erection. -845 Support changed to Offshore

ALIAS
- 40 -

SPOOLGEN (FFISYS) Screen Display

Probing Action Message - Support changed to Offshore. -846 Tack Weld Probing Action Message - Tack Weld added. -847 Support(s) added Probing Action Message - Support Welds added. -848 Automatic Weld Probing Action Message - Automatic Weld added. -849 Shop Test Probing Action Message - Shop Test Weld added. -850 REDUCING-CONCENTRIC Flange type REDUCING-CONCENTRIC selected when Probing. -851 REDUCING ECCENTRIC Flange type REDUCING-ECCENTRIC selected when Probing. -852 STUB/BACKING PAIR Flange type STUB/BACKING PAIR selected when Probing. -853 SCREWED Flange type SCREWED selected when Probing. -854 SLIP-ON J TYPE Flange type SLIP-ON J TYPE selected when Probing. -855 SLIP-ON Flange type SLIP-ON selected when Probing. -856 SOCKET-WELD Flange type SOCKET-WELD selected when Probing. -857 WELD-NECK Flange type WELD-NECK selected when Probing. -858 SLIP-ON ORIFICE Flange type SLIP-ON ORIFICE selected when Probing. -859 WELD-NECK ORIFICE Flange type WELD-NECK ORIFICE selected when Probing. -860 LAP-JOINT RING Flange type LAP-JOINT RING selected when Probing. -861 LAP-JOINT STUB END Flange type LAP-JOINT STUB END selected when Probing.

ALIAS
- 41 -

SPOOLGEN (FFISYS) Screen Display

-862 UNKNOWN Flange type UNKNOWN selected when Probing. -863 Material added Probing Action Message - Indication of Additional Materials added to pipeline. -864 General Information Note - ? Probing Action Message - General Information Note added. -865 Specific Information Note - ? Probing Action Message - Specific Information Note added. -866 Weld deleted Probing Action Message - Weld deleted. -867 Support Weld(s) deleted Probing Action Message - Support Welds deleted. -868 Spool Name deleted Probing Action Message - Spool Name deleted. -869 Flow Arrow deleted Probing Action Message - Flow Arrow deleted. -870 Message deleted Probing Action Message - Message deleted. -871 Detail Sketch deleted Probing Action Message - Detail Sketch deleted. -872 Information Note deleted Probing Action Message - Information Note deleted. -873 Additional Material deleted Probing Action Message - Additional Material deleted. -874 Loose Flange un-set Probing Action Message - Loose Flange un-set. -875 Location point added Probing Action Message - Location point added. -876 Location point deleted Probing Action Message - Location point deleted. -877 FLOOR/WALL PENETRATION Probing Action Message - Identification of FLOOR/WALL PENETRATION when Probing.

ALIAS
- 42 -

SPOOLGEN (FFISYS) Screen Display

-878 FLOW ARROW Probing Action Message - Identification of FLOW ARROW when Probing. -879 INSULATION SYMBOL Probing Action Message - Identification of INSULATION SYMBOL when Probing. -880 MESSAGE Probing Action Message - Identification of MESSAGE when Probing. -881 Drawing Identifier deleted Probing Action Message - Identification of Drawing Identifier deleted. -882 Default Start Probing Action Message - Identification of Default Start positioned. -883 Pipeline Start In Probing - Indication of Default Pipeline Start Point. -884 Default Bypass Closure In Probing - Indication of Default Bypass Closure Point. -886 Bypass Closure Probing Action Message - Redefined Bypass Closure Point. -887 Pipe Support added Probing Action Message - Pipe Support added. -888 Pipe Support deleted Probing Action Message - Pipe Support deleted. -889 Properties Changed Probing Action Message - Category change for Gaskets and Bolts. -890 Coupling Added Probing Action Message - Label showing where a Coupling has been added. -891 Coupling Deleted Probing Action Message - Label showing where an existing Coupling has been removed. -892 Pipe Support Changed Probing Action Message - Label showing where an existing Pipe Support has been chnaged.

ALIAS
- 43 -

Reference Plane System

Reference Plane System


The following ATexts are used to output the relative directions associated with Reference Planes. ^ is substituted with the Reference Plane name. ? is substituted with the distance from the Reference Plane. -443 ^ + ? -444 ^ - ? -445 ^ + ? -446 ^ - ? -447 ^ + ? -448 ^ - ? -449 ^ + ? Used for positive relative position in e/w plane. Used for negative relative position in e/w plane. Used for positive relative position in n/s plane. Used for negative relative position in n/s plane. Used for positive relative position in u/d plane. Used for negative relative position in u/d plane. Set to blank - only outputs the Relative Position.

ALIAS
- 44 -

Versions

Atext -458 -885 -849 -884 -886 -207 -385 -459 -477 -889 -469 -470 -887 -888 -890 -891 -386 -387 -388 -389 -390 -391 -392 -424 -425 -426

ISOGEN AText Editor ISOGEN Version Version Number Development Number Number V 2.3.0 V 2.3.0 V 2.3.0 V 2.3.0 V 2.3.0 V 2.3.0 V 2.3.0 V 2.3.0 V 2.3.0 V 2.3.0 V 2.3.0 V 2.3.0 V 2.3.0 V 2.3.0 V 2.3.0 V 2.3.0 V 2.3.0 V 2.3.0 V 2.3.0 V 2.3.0 V 2.3.0 V 2.3.0 V 2.3.0 v 2.3.0 v 2.3.0 v 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 74C DEV. NO. 76 DEV. NO. 77 DEV. NO. 78A DEV. NO. 78A Release Notes DEV. NO. 82 DEV. NO. 81 DEV. NO. 82 DEV. NO. 80A DEV. NO. 83D DEV. NO. 83E DEV. NO. 80B DEV. NO. 80B DEV. NO. 86B DEV. NO. 86B DEV. NO. 86J DEV. NO. 86J DEV. NO. 73B DEV. NO. 73B DEV. NO. 73B DEV. NO. 88C DEV. NO. 89A DEV. NO. 89E DEV. NO. 89E DEV. NO. 89E V7.16.0 V 7.16.2 V 7.17.0 V 7.17.0 V 7.17.0 V 8.2.0 V 8.2.0 V 8.2.0 V 8.2.0 V 8.2.0 V 8.3.0 V 8.3.0 V 8.3.0 V 8.3.0 V 8.5.0 V 8.5.0 V 8.7.0 V 8.7.0 V 8.8.0 V 8.8.0 V 8.8.0 V 8.8.0 V 8.9.0 V 8.10.0 V 8.10.0 V 8.10.0

SPOOLGEN / FFISYS Development Number PDR1654 FFISYS-PDRF020 SPOOLGEN 010 SPOOLGEN 008 SPOOLGEN 008

SPOOLGEN 015

SPOOLGEN 008 SPOOLGEN 008 SPOOLGEN 009 SPOOLGEN 009

ALIAS
- 43 -

Atext -427 -428 -431 -892 -436 -438 -433 -434 -437 -443 -444 -445 -446 -447 -448 -449 -394

ISOGEN AText Editor ISOGEN Version Version Number Development Number Number v 2.3.0 v 2.3.0 v 2.3.0 v 2.3.0 v 2.3.0 v 2.3.0 v 2.3.0 v 2.3.0 v 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 89E DEV. NO. 89E DEV. NO. 89E DEV. NO. 89F DEV. NO. 89D DEV. NO. 89D DEV. NO. 89J DEV. NO. 89J Release Notes DEV. NO. 91G DEV. NO. 91G DEV. NO. 91G DEV. NO. 91G DEV. NO. 91G DEV. NO. 91G DEV. NO. 91G Release Notes V 8.10.0 V 8.10.0 V 8.10.0 V 8.10.0 V 8.11.0 V 8.11.0 V 8.11.0 V 8.11.0 V 8.11.0 V 8.11.7 V 8.11.7 V 8.11.7 V 8.11.7 V 8.11.7 V 8.11.7 V 8.11.7 V 8.11.9

SPOOLGEN / FFISYS Development Number

Switches by number Switches by name

ALIAS
- 44 -

Anda mungkin juga menyukai